Verizon Escapade User Manual

Download

5U000201C0A REV.00

User Guide

Guía del Usuario

USER GUIDE

OM8990VW

User Guide

OM8990VW

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 1090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 1 2009.6.11 2:57:8 PM2009.6.11 2:57:8 PM

CHAPTER 1. BEFORE USING

BEFORE USING ................................................................................6

INSIDE THE PACKAGE .................................................................... 6

HANDSET DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................. 7

DISPLAY INDICATORS .................................................................... 9

INSTALLING THE BATTERY ........................................................... 12

REMOVING THE BATTERY ............................................................12

CHARGING YOUR BATTERY ..........................................................13

BATTERY HANDLING INFORMATION ............................................. 13

INSTALLING A SIM CARD ...........................................................14

REMOVING A SIM CARD ............................................................. 15

CHAPTER 2. BASIC OPERATION

BASIC OPERATION ......................................................................... 18

TURNING THE PHONE ON/OFF ..................................................... 18

ACCESSING THE MENU ................................................................ 18

MENU SUMMARY ....................................................................... 19

MAKING A CALL ......................................................................... 22

ANSWERING CALLS .................................................................... 22

ENDING A CALL .......................................................................... 22

MISSED CALL NOTIFICATION ........................................................ 22

WAIT/PAUSE .............................................................................. 22

MAKING CALLS OUTSIDE OF THE U.S. ........................................... 23

3 WAY CALLING .......................................................................... 24

CALL WAITING ........................................................................... 24

CALLING A NUMBER FROM CONTACTS .......................................... 24

ADJUSTING THE VOLUME ............................................................ 24

CALLER ID .................................................................................. 25

TURNING VIBRATE MODE ON OR OFF ........................................... 25

SPEAKERPHONE .........................................................................25

AVAILABLE OPTIONS DURING A CALL ........................................25

MAKING AN EMERGENCY CALL .................................................... 26

CHAPTER 3. MEMORY FUNCTION

MEMORY FUNCTION ......................................................................28

STORING A PHONE NUMBER ....................................................... 28

ENTERING LETTERS, NUMBERS & SYMBOLS ................................. 32

ONE, TWO, THREE TOUCH DIALING ............................................... 34

CHAPTER 4. MENU FUNCTION

CONTACTS ....................................................................................36

NEW CONTACT ........................................................................... 36

Table of Contents

Contents

CONTACT LIST ............................................................................ 36

BACKUP ASSISTANT .................................................................... 36

GROUPS .................................................................................... 36

SPEED DIALS ..............................................................................38

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ............................................................. 39

MY NAME CARD ......................................................................... 41

RECENT CALLS.............................................................................. 42

RECENT CALLS............................................................................ 42

MISSED ..................................................................................... 42

RECEIVED .................................................................................. 43

DIALED ......................................................................................43

BLOCKED ................................................................................... 44

ALL ........................................................................................... 44

VIEW TIMERS .............................................................................45

SETTINGS .....................................................................................45

BLUETOOTH ...............................................................................45

SOUNDS SETTINGS ..................................................................... 48

DISPLAY SETTINGS ..................................................................... 51

PHONE SETTINGS ....................................................................... 57

CALL SETTINGS .......................................................................... 65

MEMORY ................................................................................... 67

PHONE INFO .............................................................................. 68

SIM INFO ................................................................................... 69

SET UP WIZARD.......................................................................... 69

VOICE TOOLS ................................................................................70

VOICE COMMANDS ..................................................................... 70

TOOLS .......................................................................................... 75

CALCULATOR .............................................................................. 75

TIP CALCULATOR ........................................................................76

CALENDAR .................................................................................76

ALARM CLOCK ............................................................................78

STOP WATCH .............................................................................. 79

WORLD CLOCK ........................................................................... 80

UNIT CONVERTER ....................................................................... 80

NOTEPAD ................................................................................... 81

MY VERIZON................................................................................. 82

MY VERIZON .............................................................................. 82

CHAPTER 5. MEDIA CENTER

MEDIA CENTER .............................................................................. 84

TUNES & TONES ......................................................................... 84

PICTURES .................................................................................. 86

GAMES ...................................................................................... 88

MOBILE WEB ............................................................................. 89

Table of Contents

Contents

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 2-3090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 2-3 2009.6.11 2:57:9 PM2009.6.11 2:57:9 PM

BEFORE USING

CHAPTER 1

BEFORE USING

This chapter provides important information about using your

handset.

Inside the package

Handset descriptions

Display indicators

Installing the battery Removing the battery Charging your battery

Battery handling information

Installing a SIM card

BROWSE & DOWNLOAD .............................................................. 90

EXTRAS ..................................................................................... 91

MEDIA CENTER INFO ...................................................................91

VZ NAVIGATOR ........................................................................... 91

CHAPTER 6. MESSAGING MENU

MESSAGING .................................................................................. 94

WHEN A NEW MESSAGE ARRIVES ................................................ 94

NEW MESSAGE ...........................................................................94

INBOX ....................................................................................... 97

SENT ......................................................................................... 97

MESSAGES .................................................................................98

DRAFTS ..................................................................................... 98

VOICEMAIL ................................................................................ 98

MOBILE IM ................................................................................ 99

EMAIL ....................................................................................... 99

CHAT .........................................................................................99

ERASE MESSAGES ......................................................................100

SETTINGS .................................................................................100

CHAPTER 7. SAFETY AND WARRANTY

SAFETY ........................................................................................104

SAFETY INFORMATION FOR WIRELESS HANDHELD PHONES ..........104

SAFETY INFORMATION FOR FCC RF EXPOSURE .............................107

SAR INFORMATION ....................................................................107

HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY HAC FOR WIRELESS

TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEVICES..............................................108

FDA CONSUMER UPDATE ............................................................109

AVOID POTENTIAL HEARING LOSS. ..............................................114

FCC COMPLIANCE INFORMATION ................................................115

CTIA BATERY CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................116

WARRANTY ..................................................................................117

12 MONTH LIMITED WARRANTY .................................................117

INDEX ..........................................................................................119

Contents

Table of Contents

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 4-5090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 4-5 2009.6.11 2:57:10 PM2009.6.11 2:57:10 PM

HANDSET DESCRIPTIONS

Chapter 1 − Before Using

Before Using

Before Using − Chapter 1

Before Using

1. Earpiece: Allows you to hear the other caller.

2. Main Display Screen: Displays all the information

needed to operate your phone.

3. [ ] Directional Key: Allows you to scroll

through phone menu options and provides a shortcut to phone functions from idle mode.

4. [ ] Left Soft Key: Press to access the Message

menu or access the function listed above the key.

5. [

] Speakerphone Key: With the flip open,

press to turn speakerphone on or off.

6. [ ] SEND Key: Press to make or receive a call. In idle mode, press to access the ALL CALLS list.

7. [ ] Voicemail Key: In idle mode, press and hold to automatically connect to your voicemail server.

8. [ ] Shift Key: Press to enter an asterisk (*) character for calling features. In text entry mode, press to change the character input type. Press and hold to display the plus sign (+) for international dialing.

9. Microphone: Allows the other caller to hear you.

10. [

] Vibrate Mode Key: Press and hold to

activate/deactivate vibrate mode in idle mode. Press to enter the (#) character for calling features. In text entry mode, press to accept the word in T9 Word Mode or to add a space.

11. [ ] CLR Key: Press to clear a character from

the display. Press and hold to clear all characters. Within a menu, press to return to the previous menu.

12. [

] END/PWR Key: Press and hold to turn the

phone on/off or press to end a call or browser session. Within a menu, press to return to idle mode.

13. [ ] New TXT Message Key: With the flip open, press to access the NEW TXT MESSAGE menu.

14. [ ] Right Soft Key: Press to access Contacts in idle mode or access the function listed above the key.

15. [ ] OK Key: Press to access the MENU from idle mode. It also allows you to accept choices when navigating through a menu.

13 12

5 6

INSIDE THE PACKAGE

This package should include all items pic tured below. If any are missing or different, immediately contact the retailer where you purchased the phone.

Wall Charger

QRG

(Quick Reference Guide)

PSW

(Product Safety and

Warranty Information)

PRODUCT SAFETY AND WARRANTY INFORMATION

Handset

Battery Cover

Standard Battery

3 International Power

Plug Adapters

SIM Card

(Pre-installed)

Global Support Kit

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 6-7090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 6-7 2009.6.11 2:57:12 PM2009.6.11 2:57:12 PM

Chapter 1 − Before Using

Before Using

Before Using − Chapter 1

Before Using

DISPLAY INDICATORS

Main Indicator Icons

1X Signal Strength: 1X service is available.

D Signal Strength: Digital service is available.

GSM Signal Strength: GSM service is available.

GPRS Signal Strength: GPRS service is available.

Airplane Mode: Transmitting and receiving information is restricted.

Roaming: The phone is outside of the home service area.

SSL (Secured Socket Layer): Indicates that secure communication

between client and server has been established during data communication using encryption.

Voice Privacy: Indicates Voice Privacy mode is active.

Data Call: Data Session is in progress.

Dormant: Phone is in a dormant state during a data call. Phone reverts

to Dormant mode when there hasn’t been activity on a page for some time. The connection is still active and you can make and receive calls.

No Service: Phone cannot receive a signal from the system.

Main Indicator Icons

TTY: TTY mode is active.

Voice Call: A call is in progress. * No icon indicates the phone is in idle mode.

GPS E911 Icon: Location Service of your phone is E911.

GPS Location On Icon: Location Service of your phone is Location On.

Bluetooth: Indicates Bluetooth mode.

Bluetooth Active: Indicates Bluetooth Active mode.

Bluetooth Connected: Indicates a Bluetooth Device is connected.

Battery Level: Battery charging level - the more blocks, the stronger

the charge.

AVR Active: AVR mode is active.

AVR Listening: Indicates AVR listening.

16. External Speaker: Allows you to listen to music, sounds or ringtones.

17. Front Display Screen: Displays incoming calls, messages, signal, battery strength, time

and date.

18. Wrist Strap Eyelet: Accessory eyelet (optional straps and lanyards - sold separately).

19. Camera: Built-in camera lens.

20. Sim Card Slot: Allows you to inser t a SIM card. The SIM Card comes pre-installed in the

device (located under the battery).

21. 2.5mm Headset Jack: Allows you to plug in an optional headset for convenient, hands-

free conversations.

22. [

/ ] Volume Keys: Press to adjust the master volume in idle mode or adjust the voice

volume during a call.

23. [

] Camera Key: Press and hold to access the built-in camera.

24. [

] Voice Commands Key: Press for quick access to Voice Commands.

25. Charging / Data Jack: Plug in a wall charger or USB cable (USB cable sold separately).

1918

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 8-9090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 8-9 2009.6.11 2:57:14 PM2009.6.11 2:57:14 PM

Main Indicator Icons

SIM Card: Indicates SIM Card memory in use.

All Sounds Off: All sounds are set to off.

Alarm Only: Phone will alert you only with an alarm alert.

Vibrate Only: Phone will vibrate when call is received.

Speakerphone: Speakerphone mode is active.

Missed Calls: Indicates you have missed calls.

Message: Indicates you have a new message.

Calendar Appointment: Event Alarm is active.

Voicemail: Indicates you have voicemail messages.

Alarm On: Appears when an alarm is set.

DST: DST (Daylight Saving Time) is active.

Recent Call Icons

Dialed Call Missed Call

Received Call

New Contact Icons

Mobile1 Ringtone

Mobile2 FAX

Home Speed Dial

Work Voice Dial

Email 1 Address

Email 2 WL Messenger

Group AIM

Picture Yahoo!

Chapter 1 − Before Using

Before Using

Message Icons

New/Unread Message Priority

Opened/Read Message

Unopened Message Notification

Unread EMS

Opened Download Picture Message

Read EMS Corrupt Message

Message Delivered

Pending Message Send

Incomplete Delivery Unread MMS

Sent Message, Delivery Failed

Read MMS

Message Locked Sent Message

Text Message Draft Message Delivered

Picture Message Draft Unread WAP Push

Message Icons

Read WAP Push

Multiple Message Pending

Multiple Message Delivered

Multiple SMS/ MMS Ack

Multiple Message Failed

IM Screen

Multiple Message Incomplete

Before Using − Chapter 1

Before Using

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 10-11090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 10-11 2009.6.11 2:57:16 PM2009.6.11 2:57:16 PM

INSTALLING THE BATTERY

1. Push down on top of the battery cover and slide it off to remove.

2. Slide the battery into the slot (1) by aligning the contacts located at

the top of the unit and press (2) until you hear the “click”.

3. Align the cover tabs with the slots on the back of the device and slide

the battery cover onto the unit.

If the battery is not correctly placed in the compartment, the handset will not turn on

and/or the battery may detach during use.

REMOVING THE BATTERY

1. To remove the battery cover, push down on top of the battery cover

and slide it off of the unit.

2. Push the bottom of battery upwards while inser ting your finger into

the slot (1) and remove the battery.

3. Align the cover tabs with the slots on the back of the device and slide

the battery cover onto the unit.

Chapter 1 − Before Using

Before Using

CHARGING YOUR BATTERY

1. To charge, open the Charging/Data Jack

cover, and connect the wall charger. Make sure you align the wall charger as shown in the image. If not it will damage the charging connector on the phone and will not charge.

2. Plug the other end into a standard outlet.

3. To remove the wall charger, press the

charger’s side buttons (1) and pull the charger from the device (2).

• When you charge the battery with the phone power off, you will see a charging status

screen. You cannot operate the phone until it is powered on.

•

The battery is not fully charged at the time of purchase. Fully charge the batter y

before use.

•

It is more efficient to charge the battery with the handset powered off.

•

Battery operating time gradually decreases over time.

•

If the battery fails to perform normally, you may need to replace the batter y.

When you charge the battery beside the state, you can use INTERNATIONAL POWER

PLUGS of Europe, Australia or UK/Hong Kong.

BATTERY HANDLING INFORMATION

DO’S

•

Only use the battery and charger approved for use with this device.

•

Only use the battery for its original purpose.

•

Try to keep batteries in a temperature between 41 °F (5 °C) and 95 °F (35 °C).

If the battery is stored in temperatures above or below the recommended range, give it time to warm up or cool down before using.

•

Store the discharged battery in a cool, dark and dry place.

•

Purchase a new battery when operating time gradually decreases after fully

charging.

•

Properly dispose of the battery according to local laws.

Before Using − Chapter 1

Before Using

CORRECT INCORRECT

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 12-13090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 12-13 2009.6.11 2:57:20 PM2009.6.11 2:57:20 PM

DON’TS

•

Don’t attempt to disassemble the battery. It is a sealed unit with no serviceable

parts.

•

Don’t accidentally short circuit the battery by carrying it in your pocket or purse

with other metallic objects such as coins, clips and pens. This may critically damage the battery.

•

Don’t leave the battery in extremely hot or cold temperatures. Otherwise, it could

significantly reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery.

•

Don’t dispose of the battery by placing into a fire.

INSTALLING A SIM CARD

Your wireless device comes with a SIM card installed which along with a Global Feature on your account, enables you to make calls and access email in GSM Networks while traveling overseas. Should your SIM card be lost or damaged, please follow these instructions for the installation of your new SIM.

• If your SIM card is lost or damaged within the United States, please dial *611 from

your device or 1.800.922.0204 to speak with a Customer Service Representative. From outside of the United States dial +1- 908-559-4899.

•

Do not bend or scratch your SIM card. Avoid exposing your SIM card to static

electricity, water or dirt.

•

The SIM Card is pre-installed in your phone.

1. Remove the battery cover from the back of the unit.

2. Push the bottom of battery upwards while inser ting your finger into

the slot (1) and remove the battery.

3. Make sure the gold contacts of the SIM card are face down, then slide

the SIM card completely into the socket.

Chapter 1 − Before Using

Before Using

4. Slide the battery (1) into the slot by aligning the contacts located at

the top of the unit and press (2) until you hear it “click”.

5. Align the cover tabs with the slots on the back of the device and slide

the battery cover onto the unit.

REMOVING A SIM CARD

1. Remove the battery cover by pushing down on top of the battery

cover and sliding it off of the unit.

2. Push the bottom of battery upwards while inser ting your finger into

the slot (1) and remove the battery.

3. Remove the SIM card from the SIM card slot.

4. Slide the battery (1) into the slot by aligning the contacts located at

the top of the unit and press (2) until you hear it “click”.

Before Using − Chapter 1

Before Using

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 14-15090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 14-15 2009.6.11 2:57:21 PM2009.6.11 2:57:21 PM

BASIC OPERATION

CHAPTER 2

BASIC OPERATION

This chapter addresses and explains the basic features of your

phone including:

5. Align the cover tabs with the slots on the back of the device and slide

the battery cover onto the unit.

Please do not move your SIM Card to another device as it may cause problems with

your Global Service.

Chapter 1 − Before Using

Before Using

Turning the phone on/off

Accessing the menu

Menu summary

Making a call

Answering calls

Ending a call

Missed call notification

Wait/Pause

Making calls outside of the U.S.

3 Way calling

Call waiting

Calling a number from contacts

Adjusting the volume

Caller ID

Turning vibrate mode on or off

Speakerphone

Available options during a call

Making an emergency call

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 16-17090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 16-17 2009.6.11 2:57:23 PM2009.6.11 2:57:23 PM

TURNING THE PHONE ON/OFF

TURNING ON

1. Press and hold the END/PWR Key until your display turns on.

• If Enter Lock Code appears on the display, enter your 4-digit lock code to

unlock your phone.

• The default lock code is the last 4 digits of your Mobile Telephone

Number.

TURNING OFF

1. Press and hold the END/PWR Key until your display turns off.

• Immediately change or recharge the battery when BATTERY LOW appears

on the display. Memory may possibly be damaged if the phone turns off due to the battery completely draining.

•

Turn the phone off before removing or replacing the battery. If the phone

is on, unsaved data may be lost.

ACCESSING THE MENU

Your phone can be customized via the menu. Each function can be accessed by scrolling with the Directional Key

or by pressing the number that

corresponds with the menu item.

1. To access the menu, press the OK Key [MENU].

2. To scroll through the menu, press the Directional Key

up,

down, left or right.

3. To return to the previous page, press the CLR Key

. To exit the

current menu, press the END/PWR Key .

4. To access the MESSAGING menu, press the Left Soft Key

[Message].

5. To access the CONTACT LIST, press the Right Soft Key

[Contacts].

All directions in this manual are based on the List and Communicator Menu

Layout and The World Display Theme. If you have changed the settings, the

directions may vary.

Chapter 2 − Basic Operation

Basic Operation

MENU SUMMARY

Main Menu 2ND DEPTH 3RD DEPTH

1. Media Center 1. Tunes & Tones 1. Get New Ringtones

2. My Ringtones

3. My Sounds

2. Pictures 1. Get New Pictures

2. My Pictures

3. Take Picture

4. Online Album

3. Games 1. Get New Applications

4. Mobile Web

5. Browse & Download 1. Get New Applications Backup Assistant Mobile Email VZ Navigator

6. Extras 1. Get New Applications

2. Messaging 1. New Message 1. TXT Message

2. Picture Message

3. Voice Message

Main Menu 2ND DEPTH 3RD DEPTH

2. Messaging 2. Inbox

3. Sent

4. Drafts

5. Voicemail

6. Mobile IM

7. Email 1. Mobile Email

2. Mobile Web Mail

8. Chat

3. My Ringtones 1. Get New Ringtones

4. My Pictures 1. Open Picture Gallery

5. Bluetooth 1. Add New Device

6. Contacts 1. New Contact

2. Contact List

Basic Operation − Chapter 2

Basic Operation

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 18-19090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 18-19 2009.6.11 2:57:24 PM2009.6.11 2:57:24 PM

Main Menu 2ND DEPTH 3RD DEPTH

6. Contacts 3. Backup Assistant

4. Groups

5. Speed Dials

6. In Case of Emergency

7. My Name Card

7. Recent Calls 1. Missed

2. Received

3. Dialed

4. Blocked  This menu appears only when Incoming Call Restriction is set. For details see page 61.

5. All

6. View Timers

Main Menu 2ND DEPTH 3RD DEPTH

8. VZ Navigator 1. Launch VZ Navigator

9. Settings & Tools

1. My Verizon

2. Tools 1. Voice Commands

2. Calculator

3. Tip Calculator

4. Calendar

5. Alarm Clock

6. Stop Watch

7. World Clock

8. Unit Converter

9. Notepad

3. Bluetooth 1. Add New Device

4. Sounds Settings 1. Easy Set-up

2. Call Sounds

3. Alert Sounds

4. Keypad Sounds

5. Keypad Volume

6. Digit Dial Readout

7. Service Alerts

8. Device Connect

Chapter 2 − Basic Operation

Basic Operation

Main Menu 2ND DEPTH 3RD DEPTH

9. Settings & Tools

4. Sounds Settings 9. Power On/Off

0. Open/Close Sounds

5. Display Settings 1. Easy Set-up

2. Banner

3. Backlight

4. Wallpaper

5. Display Themes

6. Main Menu Settings

7. Dial Fonts

8. Menu Font Size

9. Time & Date This menu appears only in GSM or Global Mode is set. For details see page 64.

0. Clock Format

6. Phone Settings 1. Airplane Mode

2. Set Shortcuts

3. Voice Commands Settings

4. Language

5. Location

6. Current Country

7. Phone Security

Main Menu 2ND DEPTH 3RD DEPTH

9. Settings & Tools

6. Phone Settings 8. SIM Security

9. Network Mode

0. System Select

7. Call Settings 1. Answer Options

2. Auto Retry

3. TTY Mode

4. One Touch Dial

5. Voice Privacy

6. DTMF Tones

7. Assisted Dialing

8. Memory 1. Phone Memory

9. Phone Info 1. My Number

2. SW/HW Version

3. Icon Glossary

4. Software Update

0. SIM Info

*. Set-up Wizard

Basic Operation − Chapter 2

Basic Operation

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 20-21090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 20-21 2009.6.11 2:57:26 PM2009.6.11 2:57:26 PM

MAKING A CALL

1. Enter the phone number including the area code if needed and press

the SEND Key .

When you place or receive a call from phone numbers stored in your

Contact List, the name will be displayed.

ANSWERING CALLS

1. Press the SEND Key to answer the incoming call.

Depending on your phone’s settings, you may also answer incoming calls

by opening the phone or by pressing any key.

2. To ignore incoming calls, press the Right Soft Key [Ignore].

If Auto w/ Handsfree is set, a call is automatically answered after a preset

number of phone rings. For more details, see page 65.

ENDING A CALL

1. Press the END/PWR Key .

MISSED CALL NOTIFICATION

When an incoming call is not answered, the Missed Call icon appears on the display.

DISPLAY THE MISSED CALL FROM THE NOTIFICATION

1. Select View Now and press the OK Key.

2. To dial the phone number, press the SEND Key

DISPLAY A MISSED CALL FROM IDLE MODE

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Recent Calls and press the OK Key.

2. Select Missed and press the OK Key.

3. Select the missed call and press the OK Key [OPEN].

4. To dial the phone number, press the SEND Key

WAIT/PAUSE

Pauses are used for automated systems (i.e., voice mail or calling cards). The numbers entered after the pause will automatically be dialed after the pause. It is useful for dialing into systems that require a code.

Wait (W)

The phone stops dialing until you press the SEND Key

to dial the next

number.

1. Enter the phone number.

2. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

Chapter 2 − Basic Operation

Basic Operation

3. Select and select Add Wait and press the OK Key.

4. Enter additional number(s).

5. Press the SEND Key

to dial.

2-Sec Pause (P)

The phone waits 2 seconds before sending the next digits automatically.

1. Enter the phone number.

2. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

3. Select Add 2-Sec Pause and press the OK Key.

4. Enter additional number(s) (pin number or credit card number).

5. Press the SEND Key

to dial.

MAKING CALLS OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.

The SIM Card is pre-installed in your phone.

MAKING A GSM INTERNATIONAL CALL TO CDMA FROM ANOTHER COUNTRY

The United States is the default (reference country) on your phone. When Assisted

Dialing is set to ON (default), and the reference country is the United States, you can

place a call to the U.S. from another country by using an existing number from you contact list (as if you were in the U.S.). In this scenario, there is no need to add your current country’s exit code when you are dialing contacts with these settings.

1. Press and hold the International Dial Key to display the “+” symbol.

The “+” symbol automatically inserts the exit code for the country from which you are calling.

2. Press

to insert the U.S. country code, then enter the area code

and number.

3. Press the SEND Key

MAKING A GSM INTERNATIONAL CALL FROM ANOTHER COUNTRY GSM ONLY

1. Press and hold the International Dial Key to display the “+” symbol.

The “+” symbol automatically inserts the exit code for the country from which you are calling.

2. Enter the country code of the person you are calling. Enter the area

code, without the leading zero, followed by the number of the person you are calling.

3. Press the SEND Key

Basic Operation − Chapter 2

Basic Operation

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 22-23090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 22-23 2009.6.11 2:57:27 PM2009.6.11 2:57:27 PM

There are some exceptions for leaving out the leading zero such as Italy,

Finland and Spain.

See page 66 for details on Assisted Dialing.

3 WAY CALLING

You can talk to two participants at the same time. During the call, the normal airtime rates will be applied for each of the two calls.

1. Enter the phone number and press the SEND Key .

2. When you have connected, enter the second phone number to call

and press the SEND Key

3. When you’re connected to the second party, press the SEND Key

again to begin your 3-Way call.

If one of the participants hangs up during the call, you and the remaining

participant stay connected. If you initiated the call and are the first one to hang up, all three calls are disconnected.

CALL WAITING

If you are on a call and you receive another incoming call, you will hear one beep and the caller’s phone number will appear on the display. With Call Waiting, you may put the active call on hold while you answer the other

incoming call.

1. Press the SEND Key to answer the other call. The first call will

automatically be placed on hold. To switch back, press the SEND Key

again.

CALLING A NUMBER FROM CONTACTS

1. Press the Right Soft Key [Contacts].

2. Select the contact and press the OK Key [VIEW].

3. Select the phone number.

4. Press the SEND Key

to place the call.

Dialing from the VIEW CONTACT screen will dial the default number auto-

matically. If the contact has multiple numbers saved, select the number to dial and press the SEND Key .

ADJUSTING THE VOLUME

ADJUSTING THE MASTER VOLUME

1. Press the Volume Keys / up or down to select from: All S ounds

Off, Alarm Only, Vibrate Only, Low, Medium Low, Medium, Medium High and High.

Chapter 2 − Basic Operation

Basic Operation

2. Press the OK Key [SET] to save.

3. To check the ringtone’s volume, press the Left Soft Key

[Play].

ADJUSTING THE VOLUME DURING A CALL

1. To increase the volume, press the Volume Keys up.

2. To decrease the volume, press the Volume Keys

down.

CALLER ID

Caller ID displays the name and the phone number of the person calling. If the caller’s information is not stored in your Contacts List, only the phone number is displayed.

TURNING VIBRATE MODE ON OR OFF

Vibrate Mode mutes the tones and activates an alert for an incoming call or message.

1. To activate, press and hold the Vibrate Mode Key .

2. To deactivate, press and hold the Vibrate Mode Key

again.

SPEAKERPHONE

The Speakerphone feature lets you hear audio through the speaker and talk without holding the phone.

1. To activate, with the flip open, press the Speakerphone Key .

To deactivate, press the Speakerphone Key again.

If you activate Speakerphone when you are not on a call, it will deac tivate

automatically after one minute.

AVAILABLE OPTIONS DURING A CALL

During a phone call, you can access the following features by pressing the Right Soft Key [Options]. Press the OK Key to select any of the following options:

•

New Message

•

Contac t List

•

Recent Calls

•

Bluetooth

•

Main Menu

•

Notepad

•

Voice Privacy

Basic Operation − Chapter 2

Basic Operation

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 24-25090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 24-25 2009.6.11 2:57:28 PM2009.6.11 2:57:28 PM

MEMORY FUNCTION

CHAPTER 3

MEMORY FUNCTION

This chapter addresses memory functions including:

Storing a phone number

Entering letters, numbers & symbols

One, Two, Three touch dialing

MAKING AN EMERGENCY CALL

The 911 feature automatically places the phone in Emergency Call Mode when you dial the preprogrammed emergency number, 911. It also operates in Lock Mode and out of the service area.

MAKING AN EMERGENCY CALL IN LOCK MODE

1. Enter any of the numbers 911, *911, #911 or 112 and press the SEND

Key

The phone maintains Emergency Mode for 5 minutes. When the call ends,

the phone returns to Lock Mode.

MAKING AN EMERGENCY CALL IN ANY NETWORK MODE

1. Enter any of the numbers 911, *911, #911 or 112 and press the SEND

Key . In ALL NETWORK MODE - CDMA Mode, GSM Mode and

Global Mode.

The phone will stay in Emergency Mode for 5 minutes. While the phone

is in Emergency Mode, the phone can receive an incoming call from any available system or you can make outgoing calls even in the Emergency Callback Mode. In this case, making a call can automatically end the Emergency Callback Mode.

The 911 call does not appear in the recent calls list.

Chapter 2 − Basic Operation

Basic Operation

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 26-27090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 26-27 2009.6.11 2:57:30 PM2009.6.11 2:57:30 PM

STORING A PHONE NUMBER

The Contact List stores up to 500 entries.

ADDING A NEW CONTACT

1. Enter the phone number you want to save.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Save].

3. Select Add New Contact and press the OK Key.

4. Select Mobile 1, Mobile 2, Home, Work or Fax . Press the OK Key.

5. Enter the remaining contact information (Name, Mobile 1, Home,

Work, Email 1, Group, Picture, Ringtone, Mobile 2, IM Screen Name, Fax, Email 2, Street, City, State, Zip Code, Country) and

press the OK Key [SAVE].

6. With your SIM card inserted in the phone, you will see the following

message “SAVE A COPY OF THE CONTACT INTO THE SIM CARD?”

7. Select Yes or No and press the OK Key.

Select Update Existing to add another phone number to a contact already

stored in memory.

OPTIONS TO CUSTOMIZE YOUR CONTACTS

Once the basic phone number and name information is stored in your Contacts, you can edit and/or customize the entries.

1. Press the Right Soft Key [Contacts] and selec t the Contact you

would like to edit.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Edit].

3. Edit the information and press the OK Key [SAVE] to s ave.

ADDING OR CHANGING GROUPS

To organize your Contacts into groups:

1. Press the Right Soft Key [Contacts], then selec t the Contact

you want to add to a group.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Edit].

3. Select Group, press the Left Soft Key

[Set].

4. Select either Family, Friends or Work, press the OK Key [MARK],

then press the Left Soft Key

[Done].

5. To create a new group, press the Right Soft Key

[New]. Enter

the group name and press the OK Key [SAVE].

Chapter 3 − Memory Function

Memory Function

6. Enter the remaining contact information then press the OK Key

[SAVE].

CHANGING THE CALL RINGTONE

You can identify who is calling by setting different ringtones for different phone numbers in your Contacts.

1. Press the Right Soft Key [Contacts], then selec t the Contact

whose ringtone you want to edit.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Edit].

3. Select Ringtone and press the Left Soft Key

[Set].

4. To listen to the selected ringtone, press the Left Soft Key

[Play].

To stop press the Left Soft Key [Stop]. To select, press the OK Key.

5. Press the OK Key [SAVE] to save.

ADDING OR CHANGING THE PICTURE ID

To select a picture or graphic to assign to a Caller ID:

1. Press the Right Soft Key [Contacts], then selec t the Contact

you want to edit.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Edit].

3. Select the Picture and press the Left Soft Key

[Set].

4. Select and select the picture to set.

5. To view the selected picture press the Left Soft Key

[View].

6. Press the OK Key to select the image.

7. Press the OK Key [SAVE] to save.

ADDING OR CHANGING AN EMAIL ADDRESS

To add or change an email address:

1. Press the Right Soft Key [Contacts], then select the Contact

you want to edit.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Edit].

3. Select Email 1 or Email 2 to edit.

4. Enter the new email address and press the OK Key [SAVE] to save.

ADDING A SPEED DIAL ENTRY

To add a Speed Dial entry:

1. Press the Right Soft Key [Contacts], then select the Contact

Memory Function − Chapter 3

Memory Function

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 28-29090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 28-29 2009.6.11 2:57:32 PM2009.6.11 2:57:32 PM

you want to add to Speed Dial.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Edit].

3. Select the phone number you want to add to Speed Dial and press

the Right Soft Key

[Options].

4. Select Set Speed Dial and press the OK Key, choose a Speed Dial

location then press the OK Key [SET].

5. To assign the entry select Yes then press the OK Key.

6. Press the OK Key [SAVE] to save.

ADDING OR CHANGING A IM SCREEN NAME

To add or change a IM Service server:

1. Press the Right Soft Key [Contacts], then selec t the Contact

you want to edit.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Edit].

3. Select IM Screen Name, then press the Left Soft Key

[Set].

4. Select either AIM, Yahoo! or WL Messenger and press the OK Key.

5. Enter the user's Screen Name and press the OK Key to save.

6. Press the OK Key [SAVE] to save.

EDITING CONTACTS ENTRIES

ADDING A PHONE NUMBER FROM IDLE MODE

1. Enter the phone number you want to save (up to 32 digits).

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Save].

3. Select Update Existing and press the OK Key.

4. Select the contact to update and press the OK Key.

5. Select Mobile 1, Mobile 2, Home, Work or Fax and press the

OK Key.

6. If a phone number is already assigned to the category you selected,

select Yes to update and then press the OK Key.

ADDING A PHONE NUMBER FROM THE CONTACT LIST SCREEN

1. Press the Right Soft Key

[Contacts]. Your Contacts display

alphabetically.

2. Select the contact to update and press the Left Soft Key

[Edit].

3. Enter the phone number in the appropriate field.

4. Press the OK Key [SAVE] to save.

Chapter 3 − Memory Function

Memory Function

DEFAULT NUMBERS

The phone number saved when a Contact is created is the Default Number. If more than one number is saved in a Contact entry, another number can be set as the Default Number.

The Default Number can not be deleted. The entire Contact entry can be

deleted or another number can be assigned as the Default Number allowing you to delete the original number and keep the Contact entr y.

CHANGING THE DEFAULT NUMBER

1. Press the Right Soft Key

[Contacts]. Your Contacts display

alphabetically.

2. Select the contact to update and press the Left Soft Key

[Edit].

3. Select the number to assign as the default number and press the

Right Soft Key

[Options].

4. Select Set As Default and press the OK Key.

5. Select Yes then press the OK Key to set as the default number.

6. Press the OK Key [SAVE] to save.

EDITING STORED PHONE NUMBERS

1. Press the Right Soft Key

[Contacts]. Your Contacts display

alphabetically.

2. Select the Contact entry you want to edit and press the Left Soft

Key

[Edit].

3. Select and edit the phone number as necessar y and press the

OK Key [SAVE].

DELETING

DELETING A PHONE NUMBER FROM A CONTACT

1. Press the Right Soft Key

[Contacts]. Your Contacts display

alphabetically.

2. Select the contact to update and press the Left Soft Key

[Edit].

3. Select the number to delete.

4. Press and hold the CLR Key

to delete.

5. Press the OK Key [SAVE] to save.

Memory Function − Chapter 3

Memory Function

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 30-31090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 30-31 2009.6.11 2:57:34 PM2009.6.11 2:57:34 PM

DELETING A CONTACT ENTRY

1. Press the Right Soft Key

[Contacts] and select the contact to

delete.

2. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options], select Erase and press

the OK Key.

3. Select Yes and press the OK Key to erase.

DELETING A SPEED DIAL

1. Press the Right Soft Key

[Contacts] and select the contact

to edit.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Edit].

3. Select the phone number which has speed dial and press the Right

Soft Key

[Options].

4. Select Remove Speed Dial and press the OK Key.

5. Select Yes and press the OK Key to erase.

6. Press the OK Key [SAVE] to save.

ENTERING LETTERS, NUMBERS & SYMBOLS

The text entering mode (Alpha editor) allows you to input text, numbers and symbols. The default mode is [Abc] mode.

Key Key Functions

Abc: Press to change mode. [T9 Word][Abc][ABC][123][Symbols]

[Quick Text]

Next: Press to view the next matching word in the predictive mode.

Space: Press to select the word in predictive mode and/or add a space.

Caps Lock: Press to select a letter case of the standard text input or

text input mode. [Abc], [ABC] and [abc] indicate the standard text input. [T9 Word], [T9 WORD] and [T9 word] indicate the predictive text input. Press and hold to change mode.[Abc] -> [123] -> [T9 Word] -> [Abc].

Clear: Press to delete a character to the left of the cursor. Press and

hold to delete an entire word.

Chapter 3 − Memory Function

Memory Function

MULTITAP MODE

Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter letters, numbers and characters.

Each of the following keys will scroll through these sequential options listed by language. The limitation is 160 characters. Press the key labeled with the target letter once for the first letter press t wice for the second letter and so on. Press and hold the key labeled with the target number for that number.

Key English Spanish

. @ ? ! - , & : ' / and 1

a b c 2 a á b c 2

d e f 3 d e é f 3

g h i 4 g h i í 4

j k l 5

m n o 6 m n ñ o ó 6

p q r s 7

t u v 8

w x y z 9

PREDICTIVE MODE

T9 Word mode incorporates a built-in-dictionary to determine a word based on the entered characters. A word can be entered more quickly by pressing each key once per character. To type the word “Hello” follow these steps:

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message], select New Message and

press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the New TXT Message Key .

2. Select TXT Message and press the OK Key.

3. Enter the phone number or email address in the “To” field and press

the OK Key. In the Tex t field, press the Left Soft Key

[Abc],

select T9 Word and press the OK Key.

4. Press

, , , , to write “Hello”. Press the

Key to view the next word.

5. To select the word and add a space, press the

Key.

Memory Function − Chapter 3

Memory Function

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 32-33090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 32-33 2009.6.11 2:57:35 PM2009.6.11 2:57:35 PM

MENU FUNCTION

CHAPTER 4

MENU FUNCTION

This chapter addresses accessing the menu and using its functions

and features to customize your phone.

Chapter 3 − Memory Function

Memory Function

New contact

Contact list

Backup assistant

Groups

Speed dials

In case of emergency

My name card

Recent calls

Missed

Received

Dialed

Blocked

All

View timers

Bluetooth Sounds settings Display settings

Phone settings

Call settings

Memory

Phone info

SIM info

Set up wizard

Voice commands

Calculator

Tip calculator

Calendar

Alarm clock

Stop watch

World clock

Unit converter

Notepad

My Verizon

NUMERIC MODE

Allows you to enter numbers.

1. From the text entry screen, press the Left Soft Key [Abc], selec t

123 and press the OK Key.

2. Press the corresponding keys to input the number.

SYMBOL MODE

Allows you to enter symbols.

1. From the text entry screen, press the Left Soft Key [Abc], selec t

Symbols and press the OK Key.

2. Select the symbol you wish to enter by using the Directional Key

. Press the OK Key to select.

ONE, TWO, THREE TOUCH DIALING

Ideal for frequently dialed numbers, this feature allows contact entries to be dialed via the keypad with only one, two or three key presses. For details on assigning to Speed Dial, see page 38.

ONE TOUCH DIALING:

Press and hold the number you wish to connect to for more than 1 second.

TWO TOUCH DIALING:

Press the first digit then press and hold the second digit of the number to dial.

THREE TOUCH DIALING:

Press the first and second digits then press and hold the third digit of the number to dial.

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 34-35090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 34-35 2009.6.11 2:57:37 PM2009.6.11 2:57:37 PM

Entries can be retrieved by name or group.

NEW CONTACT

TO ADD A NEW NUMBER TO YOUR CONTACTS

For details on adding a new contact, see page 28.

CONTACT LIST

You can review all the entries stored in your Contact List or quickly find an entry by entering a name or its character.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select Contact List then press the OK Key.

2. Enter a name in the Go To field or select the contact.

3. To edit the contact, press the Left Soft Key

[Edit]. To view the

details, press the OK Key [VIEW].

Shortcut: Access the Contact List by pressing the Right S oft Key .

BACKUP ASSISTANT

Backup Assistant is a wireless service that saves a copy of your phone’s address book to a secure web site. If your phone is lost, stolen or damaged, Backup

Assistant restores your saved address book to a new phone - wirelessly! Schedule daily automatic backups or manually backup your phone book at your convenience. Login to your web account and get full access to your address book. You can view, print, add, delete and edit contacts. Changes are sent to your phone with one click! Visit Web site: https://www.verizonwireless.com/backupassistant/.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select Backup Assistant and press the OK Key to launch the application.

GROUPS

Allow you to classify phone entries into groups with up to 10 contac ts in each group. The default groups - Family, Friends or Work - cannot be erased or renamed.

TO ADD NEW GROUP

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select Groups then press the OK Key.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[New].

3. Enter a new group name and press the OK Key [SAVE].

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Contacts

TO ASSIGN PHONE NUMBER TO GROUP

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select Groups then press the OK Key.

2. Select the group to add the contact to and press the OK Key [VIEW].

3. To add a contact, press the OK Key [ADD]. Select the contact to add

and press the OK Key [MARK] then press the Left Soft Key [Done] to add.

TO CHANGE GROUP NAME

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select Groups then press the OK Key.

2. Select the group to rename, press the Right Soft Key

[Options],

select Rename, then press the OK Key.

3. Edit the group name and press the OK Key [SAVE].

ERASE GROUP

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select Groups then press the OK Key.

2. Select the group to erase and press the Right Soft Key

[Options]. Select Erase and press the OK Key.

3. Select Yes and press the OK Key to erase the group.

TO SEND A TXT MESSAGE TO A GROUP

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select Groups then press the OK Key.

2. Select the group you want to send a message to and press the Right

Soft Key

[Options].

3. Select New TXT Message and press the OK Key, then write the

message.

4. To send, press the OK Key [SEND] or press the SEND Key

For detail on writing text messages, see page 94.

TO SEND A PICTURE MESSAGE TO A GROUP

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select Groups then press the OK Key.

2. Select the group you want to send a message to and press the Right

Soft Key

[Options].

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Contacts

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 36-37090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 36-37 2009.6.11 2:57:39 PM2009.6.11 2:57:39 PM

3. Select New Picture Message and press the OK Key.

4. Select Picture and press the Left Soft Key

[My Pics]. Select the

picture to insert and press the OK Key to select.

5. Enter the remaining message information and press the OK Key

[SEND] or press the SEND Key

For detail on writing picture message, see page 95.

TO SEND A VOICE MESSAGE TO A GROUP

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select Groups then press the OK Key.

2. Select the group to send a voice message to and press the Right Soft

Key

[Options].

3. Select New Voice Message and press the OK Key.

4. Press the OK Key to being recording. Press the OK Key [STOP] to end

recording.

5. Enter any additional message information. To send, press the OK Key

[SEND] or press the SEND Key . For detail on writing voice message, see page 96.

SPEED DIALS

Calls can be placed to numbers stored in speed dial by pressing & holding the location number on the keypad. For a 2-digit location number, press the first number then press and hold the second number. For a 3-digit location number, press the first number and second numbers then press and hold the third number.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select Speed Dials then press the OK Key.

2. Select the Speed Dial position or enter the Speed Dial digit and

press the OK Key [SET].

3. Select the Contact and press the OK Key.

4. Select the number to assign the speed dial to and press the OK Key.

5. Select Yes and press the OK Key.

Unassigned appears if the location is available.

TO ERASE A SAVED SPEED DIAL

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select Speed Dials then press the OK Key.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Contacts

2. Select the Speed Dial entry to erase.

3. Press the Right Soft Key

[Remove].

4. Select Yes and press the OK Key.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Your phone has a special menu to organize your emergency contacts and personal information.

TO ASSIGN EMERGENCY CONTACTS

Follow the procedures below to register a Contact to be contacted in case of emergency or to register a medical record number or other personal information.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select In Case of Emergenc y then press the OK Key.

2. Select Contact 1, Contact 2 or Contact 3 and press the OK Key

[ADD].

3. When selecting from ADD CONTACT, select From Contacts and

press the OK Key.

4. Select the desired contact entry and press the OK Key.

5. When adding a new contact, select New Contac t and press the

OK Key.

6. Enter the contact information and press the OK Key [SAVE].

7. The contact name will be displayed in place of Contac t 1,

Contact 2 or Contact 3.

TO REASSIGN EMERGENCY CONTACTS

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select In Case of Emergenc y then press the OK Key.

2. Select the contact to re-assign and press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

3. Select Re-assign and press the OK Key.

4. Select From Contacts and press the OK Key. Select a contact from

your Contact List. When adding a new contact, select New Contact and press the OK Key.

5. Press the OK Key.

TO ERASE ASSIGNED EMERGENCY CONTACTS

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select In Case of Emergenc y then press the OK Key.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Contacts

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 38-39090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 38-39 2009.6.11 2:57:40 PM2009.6.11 2:57:40 PM

2. Select the contact to erase and press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

3. Select Unassign and press the OK Key.

TO CALL AN ASSIGNED EMERGENCY CONTACT

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select In Case of Emergenc y then press the OK Key.

2. Select the contact to call and press the Left Soft Key

[Call] or

press the SEND Key .

TO ADD PERSONAL INFO

To store a Medical Record Number or other information that may be useful in case of an emergency:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select In Case of Emergenc y then press the OK Key.

2. Select Personal Info and press the OK Key [VIEW].

3. Select Note 1, Note 2 or Note 3 and press the OK Key [ADD].

4. Enter the information and press the OK Key [SAVE].

5. The information you entered now appears in place of Note 1,

Note 2 or Note 3.

TO EDIT SAVED PERSONAL INFO

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select In Case of Emergenc y then press the OK Key.

2. Select Personal Info and press the OK Key [VIEW].

3. Select the note to edit and press the OK Key [VIEW].

4. Press the OK Key [EDIT]. Edit the note and press the OK Key [SAVE].

TO ERASE SAVED PERSONAL INFO

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select In Case of Emergenc y then press the OK Key.

2. Select Personal Info and press the OK Key [VIEW].

3. Select the note to erase and press the R ight Soft Key

[Erase].

4. Select Yes and press the OK Key.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Contacts

MY NAME CARD

A Name Card with the handset’s mobile number automatically appears.

EDIT MY NAME CARD

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select My Name Card then press the OK Key.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Edit].

3. Edit the MY NAME CARD options and press the OK Key [SAVE]

to save your changes.

SEND MY NAME CARD VIA TEXT OR PICTURE MESSAGE

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select My Name Card then press the OK Key.

2. Press the Right Soft Key

[Send].

3. Select TXT Message or Pic ture Message and press the OK Key.

4. Enter the recipient’s contact information in the To field and press

the OK Key.

5. Enter any additional message information and press the OK Key

[SEND].

SEND MY NAME CARD WITH VOICE MESSAGE

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select My Name Card then press the OK Key.

2. Press the Right Soft Key

[Send].

3. Select Voice Message and press the OK Key.

4. To record a new Voice Message, press the OK Key to start recording.

Press the OK Key [STOP] to stop recording and save it.

5. Enter the recipient’s contact information in the To field and press

the OK Key.

6. Enter any additional message information and press the OK Key

[SEND].

SEND MY NAME CARD TO ANOTHER BLUETOOTH DEVICE

Turn on Bluetooth on both devices (steps 1-4) and turn Discovery Mode to

On. Please reference to Bluetooth on page 45.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Contac ts and press the OK Key.

Select My Name Card then press the OK Key.

2. Press the Right Soft Key

[Send].

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Contacts

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 40-41090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 40-41 2009.6.11 2:57:42 PM2009.6.11 2:57:42 PM

3. Select Via Bluetooth and press the OK Key.

4. With Add New Device selected, press the OK Key. The handset will

prompt you with the following message on the LCD screen: PLACE

DEVICE YOU ARE CONNECTING TO IN DISCOVERABLE MODE.

Press the OK Key.

5. Select the desired device and press the OK Key [PAIR].

6. If applicable, the device may prompt you for the Passkey. Consult the

Bluetooth® accessory (sold separately) instructions for the appropriate password (typically 0000 - 4 zeroes). Enter the passkey and press the OK Key.

7. The screen displays Before Connecting To [Device Name], select

either Always Ask or Always Connect and press the OK Key.

8. The information is then sent via Bluetooth to the receiving device.

RECENT CALLS

The Recent Calls menu is a list of the last phone numbers or Contact entries for calls you placed, accepted, missed or blocked. It is continually updated as new numbers are added to the beginning of the list and the oldest entries are removed from the bottom of the list.

MISSED

Displays information about the 90 most recently missed calls.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Recent Calls and press the OK Key.

Select Missed and press the OK Key.

2. Select an entry and press the OK Key [OPEN] to view the entry.

3. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options] to access the following

options:

•

Save to Contacts: Store the phone number in your Contacts.

If save doesn't appear, that entry is already in your Contacts list.

•

Details: Displays details about the caller if entered in Contacts.

•

Erase: Erase a call listing.

•

Lock/Unlock: To lock or unlock a call listing.

•

View Timers: Display usage time.

4. Press the Left Soft Key [Message] to access the following

options.

•

TXT Message: Send a TXT message to the contact.

•

Picture Message: Send a Picture message to the contact.

•

Voice Message: Send a Voice message to the contact.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Recent Calls

RECEIVED

Displays information about the 90 most recently received calls.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Recent Calls and press the OK Key.

Select Received and press the OK Key.

2. Select an entry and press the OK Key [OPEN] to view the entry.

3. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options] to access the following

options:

•

S ave to Contacts: Store the phone number in your Contacts.

If save doesn't appear, that entry is already in your Contacts list.

•

Details: Displays details about the caller if entered in Contacts.

•

Erase: Erase a call listing.

•

Lock/Unlock: To lock or unlock a call listing.

•

View Timers: Display usage time.

4. Press the Left Soft Key [Message] to access the following

options.

•

TXT Message: Send a TXT message to the contact.

•

Picture Message: Send a Picture message to the contact.

•

Voice Message: Send a Voice message to the contact.

DIALED

Displays information about the 90 most recently dialed numbers.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Recent Calls and press the OK Key.

Select Dialed and press the OK Key.

2. Select an entry and press the OK Key [OPEN] to view the entry.

3. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options] to access the following

options:

•

S ave to Contacts: Store the phone number in your Contacts.

If save doesn't appear, that entry is already in your Contacts list.

•

Details: Displays details about the caller if entered in Contacts.

•

Erase: Erase a call listing.

•

Lock/Unlock: To lock or unlock a call listing.

•

View Timers: Display usage time.

4. Press the Left Soft Key [Message] to access the following

options.

•

TXT Message: Send a TXT message to the contact.

•

Picture Message: Send a Picture message to the contact.

•

Voice Message: Send a Voice message to the contact.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Recent Calls

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 42-43090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 42-43 2009.6.11 2:57:43 PM2009.6.11 2:57:43 PM

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Recent Calls

•

Voice Message: Send a Voice message to the contact.

VIEW TIMERS

Timers allow you to check you usage time and manage your calls.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Recent Calls and press the OK Key.

Select View Timers and press the OK Key.

2. Select Last Call, All Calls, Received Calls, Dialed Calls, Roaming

Calls, Transmit Data, Received Data, Total Data, Last Reset, Lifetime Calls and Lifetime Data Counter to view the

information.

3. Press the Left Soft Key

[Reset] to reset the highlighted timer.

4. Press the Right Soft Key

[Reset All] to reset all timers.

BLUETOOTH

Bluetooth technology enables wireless connections between electronic devices. If connected with a Bluetooth Handsfree device, you can use your phone more freely. Since devices with Bluetooth connectivity communicate using radio waves, your phone and the other device do not need to be in direct lineof-sight. The two devices only need to be within 10 meters (30 feet) of each other. The connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as

walls or other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth specification 2, supporting the following profiles: Headset, Handsfree, Phonebook Access and Object Push for vCard. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this phone. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or Verizon Wireless. If you want more information on this function, visit the Bluetooth Technology organization Web site: https://www.bluetooth.org/.

Features using Bluetooth technology or allowing such features to run in the

background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life.

BLUETOOTH ON/OFF

To activate Bluetooth:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Bluetooth and press the OK Key.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Turn On/Turn Off].

ADD NEW DEVICE

Pairing is the process that allows the handset to locate, establish and register a 1-to-1 connection with the target device.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

BLOCKED

This menu appears only when Incoming Call Restriction is set.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Recent Calls and press the OK Key.

Select Blocked and press the OK Key.

2. Enter the four-digit lock code and press the OK Key. The default lock

code is last 4 digits of your mobile telephone number.

3. Select an entry and press the OK Key [OPEN] to view the entry.

4. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options] to access the following

options:

•

S ave to Contacts: Store the phone number in your Contacts.

If save doesn't appear, that entry is already in your Contacts list.

•

Details: Displays details about the caller if entered in Contacts.

•

Erase: Erase a call listing.

•

Lock/Unlock: To lock or unlock a call listing.

•

View Timers: Display usage time.

5. Press the Left Soft Key [Message] to access the following

options.

•

TXT Message: Send a TXT message to the contact.

•

Picture Message: Send a Picture message to the contact.

•

Voice Message: Send a Voice message to the contact.

For details on Restrictions, see page 61.

ALL

Displays information about the most recently received, dialed and missed calls.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Recent Calls and press the OK Key.

Select All and press the OK Key.

2. Select an entry and press the OK Key [OPEN] to view the entry.

3. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options] to access the following

options:

•

S ave to Contacts: Store the phone number in your Contacts.

If save doesn't appear, that entry is already in your Contacts list.

•

Details: Displays details about the caller if entered in Contacts.

•

Erase: Erase a call listing.

•

Lock/Unlock: To lock or unlock a call listing.

•

View Timers: Display usage time.

4. Press the Left Soft Key [Message] to access the following

options.

•

TXT Message: Send a TXT message to the contact.

•

Picture Message: Send a Picture message to the contact.

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 44-45090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 44-45 2009.6.11 2:57:44 PM2009.6.11 2:57:44 PM

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Settings

•

Device Info: Displays device information.

4. If a PC or other device is connected, press the Right Soft Key

[Options], to choose from the following options:

•

Remove Device: Removes a device from the pairing list.

•

Rename Device: Renames a paired device.

•

Incoming Security: Sets permissions for connecting to an incoming device.

•

Ser vice Discovery: Search for the services that the selected device

supports.

•

Send Name Card: Send the stored phonebook to a selected device.

•

Get Name Card: Request and receive the Name card information of the

other side.

•

Device Info: Displays device information.

SETTINGS

MY PHONE NAME

To edit the Bluetooth® name of your phone:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Bluetooth and press the OK Key.

2. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

3. Select My Phone Name and press the OK Key.

4. Enter a new custom name.

5. Press the OK Key to save.

DISCOVERY MODE

Set your device to be searched for by other Bluetooth® devices in the area.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Bluetooth and press the OK Key.

2. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

3. Select Discovery Mode and press the OK Key.

If Bluetooth power is not on, you will be prompted to turn it on in order

to proceed.

4. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

SUPPORTED PROFILES

To view brief descriptions of the profiles supported by the phone:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Bluetooth and press the OK Key.

2. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

3. Select Supported Profiles and press the OK Key.

4. Select a profile and press the OK Key [VIEW] for further details.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Bluetooth and press the OK Key.

2. Select Add New Device and press the OK Key.

3. If the Bluetooth® power is switched off, the following message will

appear on the screen: TURN BLUETOOTH POWER ON? Press the OK Key to select Yes .

4. The handset will prompt you with the following message on the

screen: PLACE DEVICE YOU ARE CONNECTING TO IN DISCOVER

ABLE MODE. Press the OK Key.

5. The device will appear in the Add New Device menu. Select the

device to pair to and press the OK Key [PAIR].

6. If applicable, the handset may prompt you for the password. Consult

the Bluetooth® accessory (sold separately) instructions for the appropriate passkey (typically 0000. 4 zeroes). Enter the passkey and press the OK Key.

You do not need to input the passkey for pairing when the passkey of the

Bluetooth® Headset or hands-free kit is 0000.

7. Connect to: (device name) will appear on screen. Selec t Yes and

press the OK Key.

8. Once connected, you will see the device listed in the Bluetooth

menu and the Bluetooth® device connected icon

will appear at

the top of the screen when connected to the Bluetooth® device.

•

In the Bluetooth menu, you can disconnect the connected device with an

icon by pressing the OK Key [DROP]. Conversely, you can reconnect by pressing the OK Key again.

•

When an audio device is connected, you can select another device and the

connection is automatically transferred from that audio device to the other one.

•

If multiple devices are displayed, select the device you want to connect.

OPTIONS

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Bluetooth and press the OK Key.

2. Select the paired device.

3. If an audio device is connected, press the R ight Soft Key

[Options], to choose from the following options:

•

Remove Device: Removes a device from the pairing list.

•

Rename Device: Renames a paired device.

•

Ser vice Discovery: To search for the services that the selected device

supports.

•

Send Name Card: Send the stored phonebook to a selected device

(If selected device is HFK and supports OPP).

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 46-47090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 46-47 2009.6.11 2:57:46 PM2009.6.11 2:57:46 PM

AUTO PAIR HANDSFREE

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Bluetooth and press the OK Key.

2. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

3. Select Auto Pair Handsfree and press the OK Key.

4. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

SOUNDS SETTINGS

EASY SET UP

To set up phone sounds using the Easy Set up Wizard:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Easy

Set-up then press the OK Key.

2. Select the ringer type and press the OK Key [SET]. To skip the step,

press the Right Soft Key

[Skip].

3. Select the ringtone and press the OK Key [SET]. To listen to the

ringtone, press the Left Soft Key

[Play].

4. Select the volume of the keypad and press the OK Key [SET].

5. Select the alerts ringer type for text messaging and press the OK

Key [SET].

6. Select the alerts ringtone for text messaging and press the OK Key

[SET]. To listen to the ringtone, press the Left Soft Key

[Play].

7. Select the ringer type for multimedia messaging and press the OK

Key [SET].

8. Select the ringtone for multimedia messaging and press the OK Key

[SET]. To listen to the ringtone, press the Left Soft Key

[Play].

9. Select the alerts ringer type for voicemail messaging and press the

OK Key [SET].

10. Select the alerts ringtone for voicemail messaging and press the

OK Key [SET]. To listen to the ringtone, press the Left Soft Key

[Play].

CALL SOUNDS

Set ringtones for types of incoming calls.

CALL RINGTONE

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Call Sounds

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Settings

then press the OK Key.

2. Select Call Ringtone and press the OK Key.

3. Select a ringtone and press the OK Key to save the sound.

To listen to the ringtone, press the Left Soft Key

[Play].

CALL VIBRATE

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Call Sounds then press the OK Key.

2. Select Call Vibrate and press the OK Key.

3. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

CALL ALERT

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Call Sounds then press the OK Key.

2. Select Call Alert and press the OK Key.

3. Select Ring Only, Caller ID + Ring or Name Repeat and press

the OK Key.

ALERT SOUNDS

To select the alert type for a new message:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Alert S ounds then press the OK Key.

2. Select TXT Message, Pic/Voice Message, Voicemail or Missed

Call then press the OK Key.

3. Select access the following options and press the OK Key.

•

Tone: Alerts you with the ringtone. Select the ringtone and press the OK Key.

•

Vibrate: Alerts you with vibration. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

•

Reminder: Alerts you by time interval. Select Once, Every 2 Minutes, Every

15 Minutes or Off and press the OK Key.

EMERGENCY TONE

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Alert S ounds then press the OK Key.

2. Select Emergency Tone and press the OK Key.

3. Select Alert, Vibrate or Off and press the OK Key.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 48-49090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 48-49 2009.6.11 2:57:47 PM2009.6.11 2:57:47 PM

KEYPAD SOUNDS

To set the sound of for the alphanumeric keypad when pressed:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Keypad

Sounds then press the OK Key.

2. Select DTMF, Cloud or Simple and press the OK Key.

KEYPAD VOLUME

To set the keypad volume:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Keypad

Volume then press the OK Key.

2. Adjust the volume by pressing the Directional Key up or down and

press the OK Key.

DIGIT DIAL READOUT

The Digit Dial Readout setting controls if digits are read out loud when you type in a phone number with the keypad.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Digit Dial

Readout then press the OK Key.

2. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

SERVICE ALERTS

To set any of the three Alert options to either On or O ff:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Ser vice

Alerts then press the OK Key.

2. Select access the following options and press the OK Key.

•

ERI: The Enhanced Roaming Indicator (ERI) feature displays a text banner on

the display screen informing the handset user of which systems the wireless device is using as compared to the service plan they purchased. The ERI Banner text changes to tell a customer if they are using the: Verizon Wireless Network, Extended Network or Roaming.

•

Minute Beep: Alerts you every minute during a call.

•

Call Connect: Alerts you when the call is connected.

3. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

DEVICE CONNECT

Allows you to turn the Device Connect On or Off :

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Settings

OK Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Device

Connect then press the OK Key.

2. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

POWER ON/OFF

To set the phone to sound a tone when the phone is powered on/off :

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Power On/

Off then press the OK Key.

2. Select Power On or Power Off and press the OK Key.

3. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

OPEN/CLOSE SOUNDS

To set the phone to sound a tone when the phone is opened/closed.:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Sounds Settings, press the OK Key, select Open/Close

Sounds then press the OK Key.

2. Select Music, Simple, Beep or Off and press the OK Key.

DISPLAY SETTINGS

EASY SET UP

To set up display options using the Easy Set-up Wizard:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Easy Set-up then press the OK Key.

2. Enter the text to be displayed on your main screen and press the OK

Key [SET]. To skip the step, press the Right Soft Key [Skip].

3. Select the duration for backlight and press the OK Key [SET].

4. Select the duration for keypad backlight and press the OK Key [SET].

5. Select the main wallpaper and press the OK Key [SET].

To preview the image, press the Left Soft Key

[Preview].

6. Select the front wallpaper and press the OK Key [SET].

To preview the image, press the Left Soft Key

[Preview].

7. Select the display theme and press the OK Key [SET].

To preview the image, press the Left Soft Key

[Preview].

8. Select the menu layout and press the OK Key [SET]. To preview the

layout style, press the Left Soft Key

[Preview].

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 50-51090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 50-51 2009.6.11 2:57:48 PM2009.6.11 2:57:48 PM

9. Select the menu type and press the OK Key [SET]. To view help for

the menu type, press the Left Soft Key

[Help].

Step 9 appears only when List or Grid are selected.

10. Select the size of font for dialing and press the OK Key [SET].

To preview the font size, press the Left Soft Key [Preview].

11. Select the style of the clock for the main screen and press the OK

Key [SET]. To preview the style of the clock, press the Left Soft Key

[Preview].

12. Select the style of the clock for the front screen and press the OK

Key [SET]. To preview the style of the clock, press the Left Soft Key

[Preview].

BANNER

PERSONAL BANNER

The Personal Banner can be up to 16 characters and is displayed on your phone’s screen in idle mode.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Banner then press the OK Key.

2. Select Personal Banner and press the OK Key.

3. Enter the banner text (up to 16 characters).

4. Select Font Color, select the desired color and press the OK Key.

ERI BANNER

If you use ERI Service, ERI Text is shown on the sub banner.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Banner then press the OK Key.

2. Select ERI Banner and press the OK Key.

3. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

BACKLIGHT

To set the duration for backlight illumination for the Main Screen and Keypad:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Backlight then press the OK Key.

2. Select Display or Keypad and press the OK Key.

3. Select 7 Seconds, 15 Seconds, 30 Seconds or Always On and

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Settings

press the OK Key.

Even if Always On is selected for the Backlight setting, the backlight will

turn off when the phone is closed.

WALLPAPER

To choose the kind of Main LCD or Front LCD background to be displayed on the phone:

MAIN SCREEN

To choose the kind of Main LCD background to be displayed on the phone:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Wallpaper then press the OK Key.

2. Select Main Screen and press the OK Key.

3. Select the image and press the OK Key. To view the image, press the

Left Soft Key

[View].

The default setting is World.

4. Press the Right Soft Key [Get New] select Get New

Applications and press the OK Key to download other available

selections.

FRONT SCREEN

To choose the Front LCD background to be displayed on the phone:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Wallpaper then press the OK Key.

2. Select Front Screen and press the OK Key.

3. Select the image and press the OK Key. To view the image, press the

Left Soft Key

[View].

The default setting is Verizon_Water.

4. Press the Right Soft Key [Get New] select Get New

Applications and press the OK Key to download other available

selections.

GLOBAL TRAVELER

To change the Main LCD background automatically:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press

the OK Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select

Wallpaper then press the OK Key.

2. Select Global Traveler and press the OK Key.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 52-53090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 52-53 2009.6.11 2:57:49 PM2009.6.11 2:57:49 PM

3. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

Automatic LCD background change support at the following countries.

Belgium, Brazil, United Kingdom, France, Germany, Greece, Italy, Mexico, Netherlands, Russia and Spain. To use the personal wallpaper without changing by regions set the Global Traveler to Off.

DISPLAY THEMES

To choose the background screen:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Display

Themes then press the OK Key.

2. Selec t either Business Diary, The World, Water or White and

press the OK Key [SET]. To preview the themes, press the Left Soft Key

[Preview].

The default setting is The World.

3. To view help for the themes, press the Right Soft Key [Help].

If you change this setting, you will not be able to follow the instructions as

written in the manual.

MAIN MENU SETTINGS

To change the Main Menu layout and type:

TO SET LIST MENU LAYOUT

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Main Menu

Settings then press the OK Key.

2. Select Menu Layout and press the OK Key.

3. Select List and press the OK Key.

4. Select Communicator or Messaging and press the OK Key.

If you change this setting, you will not be able to follow the instructions as

provided in the manual.

The default setting is List and Communicator.

REPLACE LIST MENU ITEMS

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Main Menu

Settings then press the OK Key.

2. Selec t Replace Menu Items and press the OK Key.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Settings

3. If using the Communicator profile, select My Ringtones, My

Pictures, Bluetooth or VZ Navigator and press the OK Key [EDIT].

Select Email or Mobile IM and press the OK Key [SET].

4. If using the Messaging profile, select Email, Mobile IM, My

Ringtones or VZ Navigator and press the OK Key [EDIT]. Selec t Bluetooth or My Pictures and press the OK Key [SET].

5. To view help for the replace menu item, press the Right Soft Key

[Help].

6. Press the Left Soft Key

[Done] to save your changes.

POSITION LIST MENU ITEMS

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Main Menu

Settings then press the OK Key.

2. Select Position Menu Items and press the OK Key.

3. Select the item to move and press the OK Key [MOVE].

4. Select change the position and press the OK Key [SET].

RESET LIST MENU SETTINGS

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Main Menu

Settings then press the OK Key.

2. Select Reset Menu Settings and press the OK Key.

3. Select access the following options and press the OK Key.

•

Menu Layout: Restore menu layout to the initial menu layout.

•

Menu Items: Restore menu items to the initial content of the menu.

•

Item Positions: Restore menu items to their initial positions.

•

All: Restore all to your initial menu settings.

If you change this setting, you will not be able to follow the instructions as

provided in the manual.

DIAL FONTS

To set the font size:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Dial Fonts then press the OK Key.

2. Select Normal or Large and press the OK Key. To preview the font

size, press the Left Soft Key

[Preview].

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 54-55090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 54-55 2009.6.11 2:57:51 PM2009.6.11 2:57:51 PM

MENU FONT SIZE

To set the menu font size:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Menu Font

Size then press the OK Key.

2. Select Normal or Large and press the OK Key.

TIME & DATE

To set the time and date for your phone:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Time & Date then press the OK Key.

2. From the Date field, enter the date.

3. Scroll to the Time field and enter the time. Press the Left Soft Key

to change the am and pm setting.

4. Scroll to the DST field and press the Directional Key left or right to

select On or Off.

5. Scroll to the Current Time Zone field, then press the Left Soft Key

[Set]. Select the appropriate city and press the OK Key.

6. Press the OK Key to save.

This menu appears only in GSM or Global Mode.

CLOCK FORMAT

To choose the kind of clock to be displayed on the Main LCD or Front LCD screen:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Display Settings, press the OK Key, select Clock Format then press the OK Key.

2. Select Main Clock or Front Clock and press the OK Key.

3. Selec t one of the following options and press the OK Key.

•

Main Clock: Set the type of clock for the main screen. Large Digital 12 is

the default setting.

•

Front Clock: Set the type of clock for the front screen. Digital is the default

setting.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Settings

PHONE SETTINGS

AIRPLANE MODE

In Airplane Mode, all menu functions can be accessed except making calls, receiving calls, data connection and Bluetooth®. Activating Airplane Mode will disable all wireless communications. In Airplane Mode, services that support location on functions are temporarily disabled.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Airplane

Mode then press the OK Key.

2. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

SET SHORTCUTS

Your phone offers you the option of assigning a shortcut key (Directional Key left,

right, up and down) to a favorite or often-used function. In addition, choose menu

settings for each of the shortcut options under Set Directional Keys (Directional Key right).

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Set Shor tcuts then press the OK Key.

2. Select Set My Shortcuts and press the OK Key.

3. Select Shortcut 1, Shortcut 2, Shortcut 3 or Shortcut 4 and press

the OK Key [SET].

4. Select the desired option and press the OK Key.

The Download Application Alphabet option only appears when you have

downloaded Brew Applications. In idle mode, pressing the Directional Key

right will display the My Shortcuts screen. On the My Shortcuts

screen, you can select a function and press the OK Key to access the function. On the My Shortcuts screen, you can relocate a func tion by pressing the Right Soft Key

[Move], pressing the Directional Key up or down

for placement and pressing the OK Key [SAVE]. Or you can press the Left Soft Key [Settings] to Set My Shortcuts or Set Directional Keys.

RESETTING MY SHORTCUTS

To restore My Shortcuts to their original defaults:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Set Shor tcuts then press the OK Key.

2. Select Set My Shortcuts and press the OK Key.

3. Select Shortcut 1, Shortcut 2, Shortcut 3 or Shortcut 4 and press

the Right Soft Key

[Options].

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 56-57090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 56-57 2009.6.11 2:57:52 PM2009.6.11 2:57:52 PM

4. Select Reset Shortcut (1, 2, 3 or 4) or Reset My Shortcuts and

press the OK Key.

5. Select Yes and press the OK Key.

SET DIRECTIONAL KEYS

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Set Shor tcuts then press the OK Key.

2. Select Set Directional Keys and press the OK Key.

3. Select UP Directional Key, LEFT Direc tional Key or DOWN

Directional Key and press the OK Key [SET].

4. Select the desired option and press the OK Key.

RESETTING THE DIRECTIONAL KEY SETTINGS

Use the following procedure to return to the default Directional Key settings.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Set Shor tcuts then press the OK Key.

2. Select Set Directional Keys and press the OK Key.

3. Select UP Directional Key, LEFT Directional Key or DOWN

Directional Key and press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

4. Select Reset (UP, LEFT or DOWN) Key or Reset Directional Keys

and press the OK Key.

5. Select Yes and press the OK Key.

VOICE COMMANDS SETTINGS

You can use Voice Commands to control your device.

CONFIRMATION

When voice recognition is not confident it has recognized a name or number correctly, it will show you a list of up to three choices.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Voice

Commands Settings then press the OK Key.

2. Select Confirmation and press the OK Key.

3. Select Automatic, Always Confirm or Never Confirm and press

the OK Key.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Settings

SENSITIVITY

The Sensitivity setting controls how the voice recognition software determines when a spoken word is a match. If you frequently experience the messages Please Repeat or No

Match Found, adjust the sensitivity toward Reject Less. If you frequently experience false

activations (when the phone recognizes a name you didn’t say), adjust the sensitivity toward Most Sensitive.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Voice

Commands Settings then press the OK Key.

2. Select Sensitivity and press the OK Key.

3. Select Most Sensitive, Recommended or Least Sensitive and

press the OK Key.

ADAPTATION

Voice Commands are speaker independent, which means that no training or adaptation is required. Some users with heavy accents or unusual voice characteristics may find difficulty in achieving high accuracy with speaker independent Voice Commands, so the Adapt Voice feature allows users to dramatically improve the recognition accuracy through adaptation. Users who get acceptable recognition accuracy may not find any additional benefits from performing the Adapt Voice adaptation.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Voice

Commands Settings then press the OK Key.

2. Select Adaptation and press the OK Key.

3. Select Adapt Voice or Reset Voice and press the OK Key.

To begin press the OK Key.

•

Adapt Voice: Requires that you make recordings of your voice to customize

the voice recognitions system. It will take a few minutes.

•

Reset Voice: Once you finish the adaptation process, you can reset the

adaptation to the factory default settings.

The Reset Voice menu option only appears after you finish the Adapt

Voice process.

4. Wait for the beep and then repeat the sentences using a normal

tone of voice.

5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 when you are finished with a full session, you will

reach a screen that reads Adaptation Complete.

PROMPTS

Allows you to select the Voice Commands system characteristics.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Voice

Commands Settings then press the OK Key.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 58-59090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 58-59 2009.6.11 2:57:53 PM2009.6.11 2:57:53 PM

2. Select Prompts and press the OK Key.

3. Select Mode or Audio Playback and press the OK Key.

•

Mode: Select the Voice Commands system mode from the following:

- Prompts: Reads out Voice Commands prompts.

- Readout+Alerts: Read out and Alert tone prompts, dialing digits and

menus at the same time.

- Readout: Read out prompts, dialing digits and menus.

- Tones Only: Prompts you with a tone only.

•

Audio Playback: Allows audio playback to play through the speakerphone

or through the earpiece. Select Automatic, Speakerphone or Earpiece and press the OK Key.

ABOUT

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Voice

Commands Settings then press the OK Key.

2. Select About and press the OK Key.

3. The Nuance version appears.

4. Press the OK Key to return to the previous screen.

LANGUAGE

To set the bilingual feature to either English or Español:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Language then press the OK Key.

2. Selec t English or Español and press the OK Key.

LOCATION

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Location then press the OK Key.

2. Selec t access the following options and press the OK Key.

•

Location On: Your location is now available to the network.

•

E911 Only: Your location will be hidden from the network and applications,

except for 911.

When the Lock S etting is selected for Location Settings under Restrictions

on the Security Menu, you will need to enter a Lock Code. The default lock code is the last 4 digits of your mobile telephone number.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Settings

CURRENT COUNTRY

The Current Country menu allows you to select your current location.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Current

Country then press the OK Key.

2. Enter a countr y name in the Go To field or select the appropriate

country and press the OK Key [SET].

PHONE SECURITY

The Security menu allows you to electronically secure the phone. The default lock code is the last 4 digits of your Mobile Telephone Number.

EDIT CODES

To set a new Lock Code:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Phone

Security then press the OK Key.

2. Enter the four-digit lock code and press the OK Key. The default lock

code is last 4 digits of your mobile telephone number.

3. Select Edit Codes and press the OK Key.

4. Select access the following options and press the OK Key.

•

Phone Only: Allows you to edit the lock code for Phone Security. The default

lock code is the last 4 digits of your mobile telephone number.

•

Calls & Services: Allows you to edit the lock code for Restric tions. The

default lock code is the last 4 digits of your mobile telephone number.

5. If Phone Only is selected, enter the new four-digit code in the

Enter New Code field. Enter the new four-digit code again in the Re-enter New Code field and press the OK Key.

6. If Calls & Services is selected, enter the current lock code in the

Enter Current Code field. Enter the new four-digit code in the Enter New Code field. Enter the new four-digit code again in the Re-enter New Code field and press the OK Key.

RESTRICTIONS

Use the following procedure to configure Location Setting, Calls and Messages restrictions.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Phone

Security then press the OK Key.

2. Enter the four-digit lock code and press the OK Key. The default lock

code is last 4 digits of your mobile telephone number.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 60-61090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 60-61 2009.6.11 2:57:54 PM2009.6.11 2:57:54 PM

3. Select Restrictions and press the OK Key.

4. Enter the four-digit lock code again and press the OK Key. The default

lock code is the last 4 digits of your mobile telephone number.

5. Select one of the following settings and press the OK Key:

•

Loc ation Setting: Select Unlock Setting or Lock Setting and press the

OK Key.

•

Calls: Select Incoming Calls or Outgoing Calls and press the OK Key. Select

Allow All, Contacts Only, or Block All and press the OK Key.

•

Messages: Select Incoming Messages or Outgoing Messages and press the

OK Key. Select Allow All or Block All and press the OK Key.

PHONE LOCK SETTING

This setting specifies whether the phone should be locked whenever it is turned on. Lock Mode prevents the unauthorized use of your phone. Once the phone is locked, it is in restricted mode until the Lock Code is entered. You can still make emergency calls.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Phone

Security then press the OK Key.

2. Enter the four-digit lock code and press the OK Key. The default lock

code is last 4 digits of your mobile telephone number.

3. Select Phone Lock Setting and press the OK Key.

4. Select from the following options and press the OK Key:

•

Unlocked: Phone is unlocked.

•

On Power Up: Phone will lock when it is turned on.

LOCK PHONE NOW

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Phone

Security then press the OK Key.

2. Enter the four-digit lock code and press the OK Key. The default lock

code is the last 4 digits of your mobile telephone number.

3. Select Lock Phone Now and press the OK Key.

4. To unlock the phone, in idle mode, press the Right Soft Key

[Unlock] and enter the four-digit lock code and press the OK Key.

RESTORE PHONE

To delete all User Data and restore all settings to their initial defaults:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Phone

Security then press the OK Key.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Settings

2. Enter the four-digit lock code and press the OK Key. The default lock

code is the last 4 digits of your mobile telephone number.

3. Select Restore Phone and press the OK Key.

4. Select Yes and press the OK Key.

5. Follow the on-screen prompt and press the OK Key. The phone will

turn off and then back on again automatically.

SIM SECURITY

The SIM Security menu allows you to select the security settings for your SIM card.

The SIM Card is pre-installed in your phone.

PIN CODE

Allows you to edit/lock your PIN code:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select SIM Security then press the OK Key.

2. Enter the four-digit SIM lock code and press the OK Key. The default

SIM lock code is last 4 digits of your mobile telephone number.

3. Select PIN Code and press the OK Key.

4. Select one of the following options and press the OK Key:

•

PIN Lock: Allows you to lock/unlock the PIN code.

•

Edit PIN Code: Allows you to edit the PIN code. (PIN number must be

locked before editing.)

Verizon Wireless offers 24/7 Customer Support while you are traveling

abroad. If you need Customer Service assistance or Technical Support for your global device, dial:

While in the United States

•

1-800-922-0204 from any phone or your wireless phone.

•

*611 from your wireless phone while in the U.S.

While outside of the United States

•

+1 (908) 559-4899

SIM LOCK

Allows you to lock/unlock the SIM code.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select SIM Security then press the OK Key.

2. Enter the four-digit SIM lock code and press the OK Key. The default

SIM lock code is last 4 digits of your mobile telephone number.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 62-63090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 62-63 2009.6.11 2:57:55 PM2009.6.11 2:57:55 PM

3. Select SIM Lock and press the OK Key.

4. Select either Unlocked or Locked and press the OK Key.

5. To unlock the SIM card, enter the PIN Unlock Code and press the

OK Key.

NETWORK MODE

Your phone is Quad-Band Capable, which means it will work in both CDMA and GSM Destinations. While in the United States or on other CDMA roaming networks, use your phone in Verizon CDMA Mode. Use your phone in Global Mode while outside of the U.S.. You must have a SIM card in order to select GSM and Global Mode. The SIM Card is pre-installed in your phone.

For a complete list of destinations, please visit: www.verizonwireless.com/

goglobal. Network mode allows you to select from CDMA, GSM or Global

network modes.

When your phone is in Verizon (CDMA) mode, it does not necessarily mean

that you are on the Verizon Wireless Network. You may roam on other carrier’s networks domestically and internationally when your phone is in Verizon (CDMA) mode. For more information, visit: www.verizonwireless.com.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select Network

Mode then press the OK Key.

2. Selec t either CDMA Mode, GSM Mode or Global Mode and press

the OK Key.

SYSTEM SELECT

You can set your phone to search or roam on another network when you are not in your home area. Leave this setting as default unless you want to alter the system selection as instructed by your service provider.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Settings, press the OK Key, select System Select then press the OK Key.

2. Select either CDMA Settings or GSM Settings and press the OK Key.

•

CDMA Settings: Select either Automatic B, Automatic A or Home Only and

press the OK Key.

•

GSM Settings: Select either Automatic or Manual and press the OK Key.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Settings

CALL SETTINGS

ANSWER OPTIONS

To determine how to handle an answered call:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Call Settings, press the OK Key, select Answer Options then press the OK Key.

2. Selec t either Flip Open, Any Key or Auto w/ Handsfree and press

the OK Key [MARK].

3. Press the Left Soft Key

[Done].

• Flip Open is the default setting for this device.

•

When the phone is closed, the Auto w/ Handsfree Mode will not

function, except when a headset is connected.

•

Auto w/ Handsfree will function after about five seconds and is available

only when connected to a headset or hands-free device.

•

To answer all incoming calls, press the SEND Key .

AUTO RETRY

Set the length of time the phone waits before automatically redialing a number when the attempted call fails.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Call Settings, press the OK Key, select Auto Retry then press the OK Key.

2. S elect either 10 Seconds, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds or Off and

press the OK Key.

TTY MODE

You can attach a TTY device to your phone enabling you to communicate with parties also using a TTY device. A phone with TTY support is able to translate typed characters to voice. Voice can also be translated into characters and then displayed on the TTY.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Call Settings, press the OK Key, select TT Y Mode then press the OK Key.

2. S elect either TTY Full, TT Y + Talk, TTY + Hear or TTY Off and

press the OK Key.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 64-65090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 64-65 2009.6.11 2:57:56 PM2009.6.11 2:57:56 PM

ONE TOUCH DIAL

To initiate a speed dial call by holding down the speed dial digit:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Call Settings, press the OK Key, select One Touch

Dial then press the OK Key.

2. Selec t On or Off and press the OK Key.

If One Touch Dial is disabled, speed dial numbers designated in your

contacts will not function.

VOICE PRIVACY

Turn the voice privacy feature On or Off.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Call Settings, press the OK Key, select Voice Privacy then press the OK Key.

2. S elect On or Off and press the OK Key.

DTMF TONES

To set the Key Tone length and touch tone playback speed:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Call Settings, press the OK Key, select DTMF Tones then

press the OK Key.

2. Selec t one of the following options and press the OK Key.

•

Normal: Sends out a tone for a fixed period of time even if you continue

to press the key.

•

Long: Sends out a continuous tone for the duration the key is pressed

and held.

ASSISTED DIALING

This menu allows you to select Assisted Dialing for a destination where you are making a call.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Call Settings, press the OK Key, select Assisted Dialing then press the OK Key.

Press the Right Soft Key [Help], to view the help menu.

2. Under Assisted Dialing, press the Directional Key left or right to

select On or Off.

3. When selecting On, scroll down to the Reference Country field,

and then press the Left Soft Key

[Set]. Enter a country name

in the Go To field or select the appropriate country and press the OK Key.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Settings

4. While on the screen with the list of Countries, press the Left Soft Key

[Details] to edit the following options:

•

Country Code

•

IDD Prefix

•

NDD Prefix

•

Area/City Code

•

National Number Length

5. Press the OK Key to save.

When Assisted Dialing is On, the number edit screen will display “Assisted

Dialing On” when dialing a number.

MEMORY

Select this option to display phone memor y information and to delete in phone memory.

PHONE MEMORY USAGE

Check the available phone memory.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Memory, press the OK Key, select Phone Memory then press the OK Key.

2. Select Memory Usage and press the OK Key.

3. Press the OK Key to return to the previous screen.

DELETING FILES

To delete files stored in Phone Memory:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Memory, press the OK Key, select Phone Memory then press the OK Key.

2. Select either My Pictures, My Ringtones, My Sounds or My

Contacts and press the OK Key.

3. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

4. Select Erase and press the OK Key.

5. Select a file, press the OK Key [MARK] or the Right Soft Key

[Mark All], then press the Left Soft Key [Done].

6. Select Yes and press the OK Key to delete.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 66-67090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 66-67 2009.6.11 2:57:57 PM2009.6.11 2:57:57 PM

PHONE INFO

MY NUMBER

To view your phone number:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Info, press the OK Key, select My Number then press the OK Key.

2. Select one of the following options and press the OK Key:

•

CDMA Number: Displays the MDN, MIN and service provider.

•

GSM Number: Displays the Mobile Device Number.

3. Press the OK Key to return to the previous screen.

SW/HW VERSION

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Info, press the OK Key, select SW/HW Version then press the OK Key.

2. Displays the Software Version, PRL Version, ERI Version,

Browser Version, Media Center Version, MSUI Version, HW Version and MEID.

3. Press the OK Key to return to the previous screen.

ICON GLOSSARY

To view all the icons and their meanings:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Info, press the OK Key, select Icon Glossary then press the OK Key.

2. Press the OK Key to return to the previous screen.

For details on icons, see page 9.

SOFTWARE UPDATE

The update phone firmware (software) option allows you to download and update the software in your phone automatically. Only the internal software is updated; no contacts entries or other information saved to your phone will be deleted.

STATUS

To check the latest software download or update status:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Info, press the OK Key, select Software Update then press the OK Key.

2. Select Status and press the OK Key.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Settings

CHECK NEW

To check Download Server for new Software updates:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Phone Info, press the OK Key, select Software Update then press the OK Key.

2. Select Check New and press the OK Key.

SIM INFO

To view the SIM ID number for your phone.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select SIM Info and press the OK Key.

2. The SIM ID number is displayed.

3. Press the OK Key to return to the previous screen.

SET UP WIZARD

To set up options using the Set up Wizard:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Set-up Wizard and press the OK Key.

2. Select the call sounds ringer type and press the OK Key [SET]. To skip

the step, press the Right Soft Key

[Skip].

3. Select the ringtone and press the OK Key [SET]. To listen to the

selected ringtone, press the Left Soft Key

[Play].

4. Select the display theme and press the OK Key [SET].

To preview the theme, press the Left Soft Key

[Preview].

5. Select the main menu layout and press the OK Key [SET]. To preview

the style of the layout, press the Left Soft Key

[Preview].

6. Select the menu type by pressing the OK Key [SET].

For an explanation, press the Left Soft Key

[Help].

Step 6 appears only when List or Grid main menu selected.

7. Select the type of clock for the main screen and press the OK Key

[SET]. To preview the type of clock, press the Left Soft Key [Preview].

8. Select the type of clock for the front screen and press the OK Key

[SET]. To preview the type of clock, press the Left Soft Key [Preview].

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Settings

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 68-69090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 68-69 2009.6.11 2:57:59 PM2009.6.11 2:57:59 PM

VOICE COMMANDS

Your phone is equipped with an AVC (Advanced Voice Commands) feature. This feature allows you to make calls or use the phone’s functions by simply using your voice. All you have to do is talk into the phone and the phone will recognize your voice and complete tasks by itself.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: With the flip open, press the Voice Commands Key on the

right side of your phone to access Voice Commands.

2. The phone displays the Voice Commands menu and prompts you

to say the name of the command you want to use. To complete your task, simply follow the voice prompts. You can speak the name of the command after you hear a beep.

You can hear a beep in the Tone Only Mode (Settings & Tools > Phone

Settings > Voice Commands Settings > Prompts > Mode > Tones Only)

while you can see a prompt without a beep sound in the Prompts or

Readout.

3. Selec t either Call <Name or #>, Send <MSG Type>, Go To

<Shortcut>, Check <Item>, Contact <Name>, Redial,

My Verizon or Help and press the OK Key.

4. When it recognizes one of these commands, the phone launches the

associated application. If the phone does not hear a command within approximately eight seconds, AVC mode will turn itself off.

CALL <NAME OR #>

Use the Call command to voice dial a name from your Contact List or a phone number. When dialing a number, pronounce each digit, but do not pause noticeably between the digits.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

2. You will hear Please say a command and the Voice Commands

menu will be displayed.

3. If calling a contact from your list, say Call <Name>. Your phone

will ask you to confirm the name you said. Say Ye s if it was repeated correctly. That phone number will be dialed. If there is more than one number saved for that contact, you will be asked to confirm which

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Voice Tools

number to dial. Examples: - Call Tom Smith, - Call 617-555-1212, - Call Bob Carson’s

mobile, - Call Dee Harper at Home.

SEND <MSG TYPE>

Use the Send command to send a text or other type of message to a specified name or number.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

2. You will hear Please say a command and the Voice Commands

menu will be displayed.

3. S a y Send followed immediately by one of Text , Picture or Voice.

Examples: - Send Text Tom Smith, - Send Picture to D ee Harper’s Mobile.

GO TO <SHORTCUT>

Use the Go To command to open an application on your phone. You can say Go To by

itself and be prompted to say the application name or you can skip the prompt by saying Go To followed by the application name.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

2. You will hear Please say a command and the Voice Commands

menu will be displayed.

3. S a y Go To followed immediately by one of the Alarm Clock,

Bluetooth, Bluetooth On/Off, Browse & Download, Calculator, Calendar, Call Settings, Chat, Contacts, Contact List, D isplay Settings, Extras, Games, Get New Browse & Download, Get New Extra, Get new Game, Get new Pictures, Get New Ringtones, Media Center, Messaging, Messaging Inbox, Mobile Email, Mobile IM, Mobile Web Mail, My Pictures, My Ringtones, My Sounds, My Verizon, New Contact, New Picture Message, New TXT message, New Voice Message, Notepad, Online Album, Phone Settings, Pictures, Recent Calls, Settings & Tools, Sounds Settings, Tip Calculator, Tools, Tunes & Tones,

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Voice Tools

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 70-71090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 70-71 2009.6.11 2:58:0 PM2009.6.11 2:58:0 PM

Unit Converter, VZ Navigator, Memory, Phone Info.

CHECK <ITEM>

The Check command lets you check status information for your phone. You can say

Check or Check Status to see and hear all status information.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

2. You will hear Please say a command and the Voice Commands

menu will be displayed.

3. S a y Check followed immediately by one of the following: Status,

Voicemail, Messages, Missed Calls, Time, Signal Strength, Battery Level, Volume, Balance, Minutes, Payment or My Number.

CONTACTS <NAME>

Use the Contacts command to retrieve and display information for any name stored in your Contact List.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

2. You will hear Please say a command and the Voice Commands

menu will be displayed.

3. S a y Contact <Name>.

Examples: - Contact Tom Jones.

4. The View Contact page will be displayed for that contact name.

REDIAL

Use the Redial command to redial with the directory number which talks over the phone recentry.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Voice Tools

2. You will hear Please say a command and the Voice Commands

menu will be displayed.

3. S a y Redial.

MY VERIZON

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

2. You will hear Please say a command and the Voice Commands

menu will be displayed.

3. S a y My Verizon.

4. Your phone will make a web connection.

HELP

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

2. You will hear Please say a command and the Voice Commands

menu will be displayed.

3. S a y Help.

4. The Help guide will be displayed on your phone.

5. Press the OK Key to return to the previous screen.

VOICE COMMANDS SETTINGS

CONFIRMATION

When voice recognition is not confident it has recognized a name or number correctly, it will show you a list of up to three choices. You can control when choice lists appear.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

2. Press the Right Soft Key [Settings], select Confirmation and

press the OK Key.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Voice Tools

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 72-73090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 72-73 2009.6.11 2:58:1 PM2009.6.11 2:58:1 PM

3. Select Automatic, Always Confirm or Never Confirm and press

the OK Key.

SENSITIVITY

The Sensitivity setting controls how the voice recognition software determines when a spoken word is a match. If you frequently experience the messages Please Repeat or No

Match Found, adjust the sensitivity toward Reject Less. If you frequently experience false

activations (when the phone recognizes a name you didn’t say), adjust the sensitivity toward Most Sensitive.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

2. Press the Right Soft Key [Settings], select Sensitivity and

press the OK Key.

3. Select Most Sensitive, Recommended or Least Sensitive and

press the OK Key.

ADAPTATION

Voice Commands are speaker independent, which means that no training or adaptation is required. Some users with heavy accents or unusual voice characteristics may find

difficulty in achieving high accuracy with speaker independent Voice Commands, so the Adapt Voice feature allows users to dramatically improve the recognition accuracy through adaptation. Users who get acceptable recognition accuracy will find no additional benefit to performing the Adapt Voice adaptation.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

2. Press the Right Soft Key [Settings], select Adaptation and

press the OK Key.

3. Select Adapt Voice or Reset Voice and press the OK Key.

To begin press the OK Key.

•

Adapt Voice: Requires that you make recordings of your voice to customize

the voice recognitions system. It will take a few minutes.

•

Reset Voice: Once you finish the adaptation process, you can reset the

adaptation to the factory default settings.

The Reset Voice menu option only appears after you finish the Adapt

Voice process.

4. Wait for the beep and then repeat the sentences using a normal

tone of voice.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Voice Tools

5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 when you are finished with a full session, you will

reach a screen that reads Adaptation Complete.

PROMPTS

Allows you to select the Voice Commands system characteristics.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

2. Press the Right Soft Key [Settings], select Prompts and press

the OK Key.

3. Select Mode or Audio Playback and press the OK Key.

•

Mode: Select the Voice Commands system mode from the following:

- Prompts: Read out Voice Commands prompts.

- Readout+Alerts: Read out and Alert tone prompts, dialing digits and

menus at the same time.

- Readout: Read out prompts, dialing digits and menus.

- Tones Only: Prompts you with a tone only.

•

Audio Playback: Allows audio playback to play through the speakerphone

or through the earpiece. Select Automatic, Speakerphone or Earpiece and press the OK Key.

ABOUT

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Voice Commands then press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Voice Commands Key located on the

right side of the phone.

2. Press the Right Soft Key [Settings], select About and press

the OK Key.

3. The Nuance version appears.

4. Press the OK Key to return to the previous screen.

CALCULATOR

Allows you to perform simple mathematical calculations.

USING THE CALCULATOR

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Calculator then press the OK Key.

2. Follow the instructions below to calculate 8×6÷4-2.5=9.5

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Tools

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 74-75090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 74-75 2009.6.11 2:58:3 PM2009.6.11 2:58:3 PM

Directional Key right

Directional Key down

Directional Key left

Directional Key up

OK Key

×÷+=

•

Input 8 and press the Directional Key right.

•

Input 6 and press the Directional Key left.

•

Input 4 and press the Directional Key down.

•

Input 2 and press the International Dial Key to input (.).

•

Input 5.

•

Press the OK Key and you will see the answer (9.5).

•

Press the Right Soft Key [Operator] to use the following:

( / ) / Exponent.

•

Press the Left Soft Key [Clear] to reset.

•

To change the displayed number from positive (+) to negative (-) and

vice versa, press the Vibrate Key .

TIP CALCULATOR

Calculates the tip and determines how much each person should pay.

USING THE TIP CALCULATOR

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Tip Calculator then

press the OK Key.

2. From the Total Bill field, enter the amount of the total bill.

3. Select the Tip(%) field and press the Directional Key left or right to

adjust the Tip Percentage.

4. Select the Split field and press the Directional Key left or right to

adjust the amount of people paying.

5. In the area below, the calculator will automatically display the Tip,

and the share of the bill for each person.

6. Press the Left Soft Key

[Reset] to reset.

7. Press the Right Soft Key

[Close] to return to the previous

screen.

CALENDAR

The Calendar tool provides easy and convenient access to your schedule. Simply store your appointments and your phone will alert you to them.

SETTING THE SCHEDULE

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Calendar then press

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Tools

the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Directional Key down to access

Calendar.

2. Select the scheduled day and press the Left Soft Key [Add].

3. From the Appointment field, enter the appointment.

4. Selec t Start Time and enter the time. Press the Left Soft Key

for am/pm.

5. Selec t End Time and enter the time. Press the Left Soft Key

for am/pm.

6. Selec t Start Date and enter the date.

7. Selec t Recurrence and press the Directional Key left or right to

select either Once, Daily, Weekly, Monthly or Yearly.

8. Selec t End Date and enter the date.

9. Selec t Time Zones and press the Left Soft Key

[Set], select the

time zone and press the OK Key.

10. Selec t Alert and press the Left Soft Key

[Set]. Select the

desired ringtone and press the OK Key.

11. Selec t Vibrate and press the Directional Key left or right to turn

Off or On.

12. Selec t Reminder and press the Directional Key left or right

to select either Off, Once, Every 2 Minutes or Every 15 Minutes.

13. Selec t Alert Time and press the Directional Key left or right to

select either On Time, 5 min before, 10 min before, 15 min

before, 30 min before, 1 hour before, 3 hours before, 5 hours before or 1 day before.

14. Press the OK Key [SAVE] to save it. The date of the event will be

marked on your calendar.

VIEWING EVENT LIST

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Calendar then press the OK Key.

2. Select the event and press the OK Key [VIEW].

ERASING SAVED EVENT

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Calendar then press the OK Key.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Tools

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 76-77090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 76-77 2009.6.11 2:58:4 PM2009.6.11 2:58:4 PM

2. Select the event and press the OK Key [VIEW].

3. Press the Left Soft Key

[Erase], select Yes and press the OK Key.

ERASING ALL PASSED EVENTS

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Calendar then press the OK Key.

2. Select the event and press the OK Key [VIEW].

3. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options], select Erase Passed and

press the OK Key, select Yes and press the OK Key.

ALARM CLOCK

The Alarm Clock tool allows you to set up to three alarms. When you set an alarm, the current time is displayed at the top of the screen. When the alarm goes off, Alarm 1 (or 2 or 3, as applicable) will be displayed on the LCD screen and the alarm will sound.

SETTING THE ALARM

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Alarm Clock then press

the OK Key.

2. Select Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3 and press the OK Key.

3. From the Alarm field, press the Directional Key left or right to turn

On or Off.

4. Selec t Time and enter the time. Press the Left Soft Key

for

am/pm.

5. Selec t Frequency and press the Directional Key left or right to select

either Once, Daily, Mon–Fri or Weekends.

6. Selec t Ringtone and press the Left Soft Key

[Set]. Select the

desired ringtone and press the OK Key.

7. To save an alarm setting, press the OK Key [SAVE].

TURNING ON/OFF THE ALARM

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Alarm Clock then press the OK Key.

2. Select Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3 and press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

3. Select Turn On/Turn Off and press the OK Key.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Tools

RESETTING THE ALARM

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Alarm Clock then press the OK Key.

2. Select Alarm 1, Alarm 2 or Alarm 3 and press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

3. Select Reset Alarm and press the OK Key. Select Ye s and press the

OK Key.

RESET ALL ALARM SETTINGS

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Alarm Clock then press the OK Key.

2. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

3. Select Reset All and press the OK Key. Select Ye s and press the OK

Key.

STOP WATCH

Measures elapsed time for activities.

USING THE STOP WATCH

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Stop Watch then press the OK Key.

2. Press the OK Key [START] to start.

3. Press the OK Key [STOP] to pause.

4. Press the Right Soft Key

[Reset] to reset.

MEASURING MORE THEN ONE EVENT

1. Press the OK Key [START] to start.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[Lap] to stop a time period and continue

measuring another one.

3. Press the Left Soft Key

[Lap] to stop the second and continue

measuring a third one. Repeat this step as necessary.

4. Press the OK Key [STOP] to pause.

5. Press the Left Soft Key

[View] to review the results.

6. Press the OK Key to return to the stop watch.

You can measure up to 8 lap times.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Tools

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 78-79090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 78-79 2009.6.11 2:58:6 PM2009.6.11 2:58:6 PM

WORLD CLOCK

To display the time and date in pre-programmed cities:

SETTING THE CLOCK

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select World Clock then press the OK Key.

2. Press the Directional Key left or right to select the city.

3. Press the Left Soft Key

[Cities] to access the CITIES LIST.

4. Selec t the city and press the OK Key.

SETTING DST DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME

1. Press the Right Soft Key [DST] to set the DST options.

2. From the City field, press the Directional Key left or right to select

the desired city.

3. Select DST and press the Directional Key left or right to turn

On or Off.

4. Select Start Date and enter the start date.

5. Select Start Time and enter the start time. Press the Left Soft Key

for am/pm.

6. Select End Date and enter the end date.

7. Select End Time and enter the end time. Press the Left Soft Key

for am/pm.

8. Press the OK Key [SAVE] to set.

UNIT CONVERTER

This function converts any measurement into a unit you want. There are 5 types of units that can be converted: Length, Area, Volume, Weight and Temperature.

USING THE UNIT CONVERTER

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Unit Converter then press the OK Key.

2. Press the Directional Key left or right to select either either Length,

Area, Volume, Weight or Temperature.

3. Press the Directional Key up or down to select the measure for the

quantity you want converted field.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

Tools

4. When inputting a number, the conversion is automatically calculated

in the different fields.

5. Press the Left Soft Key

[Reset] to reset. Press the Right Soft Key

[.] to enter a decimal point.

NOTEPAD

Your phone includes an internal notepad that can be used to compose and store reminders and notes.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Notepad then press the OK Key.

2. Press the Left Soft Key

[New] to write a new note.

3. Enter the note.

4. Press the OK Key [SAVE].

VIEW SAVED MEMO

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Notepad then press the OK Key.

2. Press the OK Key [VIEW] to view a selected note.

ERASE SAVED MEMO

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Notepad then press the OK Key.

2. Select the desired saved memo.

3. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options], select Erase and press

the OK Key.

4. Select Yes and press the OK Key.

ERASE ALL SAVED MEMOS

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the

OK Key. Select Tools, press the OK Key, select Notepad then press the OK Key.

2. Select the desired saved memo.

3. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options], select Erase All and press

the OK Key.

4. Select Yes and press the OK Key.

Menu Function − Chapter 4

Tools

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 80-81090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 80-81 2009.6.11 2:58:7 PM2009.6.11 2:58:7 PM

MY VERIZON

To access your Verizon account information:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Settings & Tools and press the OK

Key. Select My Verizon and press the OK Key

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Directional Key left to access

My Verizon.

2. Select access the following options.

•

Balance: Information about your balance.

•

Usage: Information about your usage.

•

Payments: Information about your payments.

•

My Plan: Information about your plan.

•

My Features: Information about your service features.

•

Chg Vmail Pswd: Resetting about your voicemail password.

•

Find Store: Information about stores near you.

•

Mobile2Mobile: Information about gift card options.

•

FAQs: Frequently asked questions.

Chapter 4 − Menu Function

My Verizon

MEDIA CENTER

CHAPTER 5

MEDIA CENTER

Your phone provides a unique feature -Media Center- that enables you to download ringtones, wallpapers, games and more from your network to your phone. Please contact your service provider for the

availability of these services.

Tunes & Tones

Pictures

Games

Mobile Web

Browse & Download

Extras

Media Center info

VZ Navigator

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 82-83090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 82-83 2009.6.11 2:58:9 PM2009.6.11 2:58:9 PM

TUNES & TONES

GET NEW RINGTONES

To connect to MEDIA CENTER and download various ringtones:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Media Center and press the OK

Key. Select Tunes & Tones and press the OK Key.

2. Select Get New Ringtones and press the OK Key.

3. Select one of the following options and press the OK Key:

•

VZW Tones Deluxe: To launch VZW Tones Deluxe application.

•

Selec t Get New Applications and press the OK Key.

4. Choose the application which you want to download from the list

displayed on the screen.

MY RINGTONES

PLAY DOWNLOADED TUNES OR TONES

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select My Ringtones and press the OK

Key.

2. Select the tune or tone to play and press the OK Key [PLAY].

3. To stop, press the OK Key [STOP].

ERASE DOWNLOADED TUNES OR TONES

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select My Ringtones and press the OK

Key.

2. Select the tune or tone to erase and press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

3. Select Erase and press the OK Key.

4. Select Yes and press the OK Key.

The preloaded Ringtones cannot be erased.

ASSIGNING DOWNLOADED TUNES OR TONES

To select a desired ringtone:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select My Ringtones and press the OK

Key.

2. Select the desired ringtone and press the Left Soft Key

[Set As].

•

Ringtone: S etting as default ringtone.

•

Contac t ID: Setting the ringtone for each contact.

Chapter 5 − Media Center

Media Center

•

Aler t Sounds: Setting the alert tone for All Messages, TXT Message,

Pic/Voice Msg or Voicemail.

3. Press the Right Soft Key [Options] to access the following

options.

•

Erase: Erase the current ringtone.

•

Rename: Rename the ringtone’s title.

•

Lock/Unlock: Lock or unlock the current ringtone.

•

Erase All: Erase all the ringtones.

•

File Info: Displays information about the selected ringtone.

MY SOUNDS

To select a desired sound or record a new sound:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Media Center and press the OK

Key. Select Tunes & Tones and press the OK Key.

2. Select My Sounds and press the OK Key.

3. Select the desired sound and press the OK Key [PL AY] to play.

4. Press the OK Key [STOP] to stop playing. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options] to access the following options:

• DOWNLOADED or RECORDED SOUND:

Send: Send the sound. To Online Album: Upload the selected sound to Online Album. Rename: Rename the sound’s title. Lock/Unlock: Lock or unlock the selected sound. Erase: Erase the selected sound. Erase All: Erase all the sounds. File Info: Displays information for the selected sound.

• PRELOADED SOUND:

Send: Send a sound. To Online Album: Upload the selected sound to Online Album. File Info: Displays information for the selected sound.

RECORDING NEW SOUNDS

To record a new sound:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Media Center and press the OK

Key. Select Tunes & Tones and press the OK Key.

2. Select My Sounds and press the OK Key.

3. Select Record New and press the OK Key.

4. Press the OK Key to begin recording.

Media Center − Chapter 5

Media Center

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 84-85090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 84-85 2009.6.11 2:58:10 PM2009.6.11 2:58:10 PM

5. Press the OK Key [STOP] to finish recording. It will automatically be

saved in My Sounds.

6. To rename, press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

7. Select Rename and press the OK Key.

8. Enter the new name and press the OK Key.

ERASE A SOUND

To erase a sound:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Media Center and press the OK

Key. Select Tunes & Tones and press the OK Key.

2. Select My Sounds and press the OK Key.

3. Select the sound to erase and press the Right Soft Key

[Options].

4. Select Erase and press the OK Key.

5. Select Yes and press the OK Key.

The preloaded sounds cannot be erased.

PICTURES

GET NEW PICTURES

To connect to MEDIA CENTER and download a variety of Pictures (images):

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Media Center and press the OK

Key. Select Pictures, press the OK Key, select Get New Pictures then press the OK Key.

2. Select Get New Applications and press the OK Key.

3. Choose the application you want to download from the list displayed

on the screen and follow the prompts.

4. The downloaded contents are saved in My Pictures.

The downloaded application will be included in the list displayed when

you access Menu > Media Center > Pictures > Get New Pictures > Get

New Applications.

MY PICTURES

In My Pictures you can view all the pictures you have taken, store selec ted images in your phone, send pictures to the Online Album, delete images and access additional picture options.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select My Pictures and press the OK Key.

Chapter 5 − Media Center

Media Center

2. Select the desired image. Press the Right Soft Key [Options] to

access the following options.

•

Send: S end a picture message, or upload to online album.

•

Set As: Assigns the selected picture to display for specific tasks.

•

Take Picture: Take a new picture.

•

Get New Pictures: Download various pictures.

•

Rename: Rename the selected picture.

•

Lock/Unlock: Lock or unlock the selected picture. Locked pictures cannot be

deleted by the Erase All function. Only pic tures you downloaded or took with the camera can be erased.

•

Erase All: Erase all the pictures in your phone.

•

File Info: Displays information about the selected picture.

TO ERASE THE CURRENT PICTURE

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select My Pictures and press the OK Key.

2. Select the picture to erase and press the Left Soft Key

[Erase].

3. Select Yes and press the OK Key.

TAKE PICTURE

1. To access the camera, with the flip open, press and hold the Side

Camera Key

2. Focus on the object.

3. Press the Directional Key left or right to zoom in or out. (Except for

the 1600X1200 resolution mode). Press the Right Soft Key [Options] to access the following options.

Name Description

Resolution 1600x1200, 1280x960, 640x480, 320x240

Self Timer Off, 3 Seconds, 5 Seconds, 10 Seconds

Brightness -2, -1, 0, +1, +2

White Balance Auto, Sunny, Cloudy, Tungsten, Fluorescent, Darkness

Shutter Sound Shutter, Silent, Say “Cheez”, Ready! 123

Color Effects Normal, Antique, Black & White, Negative

Capture Mode Landscape, Portrait

Sub Display Take a self-portrait by activating the sub display.

To view captured images, press the Left Soft Key [My Pics].

Media Center − Chapter 5

Media Center

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 86-87090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 86-87 2009.6.11 2:58:12 PM2009.6.11 2:58:12 PM

4. Press the side Camera Key or press the OK Key [TAKE] to take the

picture.

5. To save the picture, press the Left Soft Key

[Save]. To take

another picture without saving, press the Right Soft Key [Erase]. To send as a Picture Message, press the OK Key [SEND].

ONLINE ALBUM

To access Online Album:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Media Center and press the OK

Key. Select Pictures, press the OK Key, select Online Album then press the OK Key.

2. The browser launches and the Online Album sign-on screen

appears.

3. Follow the on-screen prompts.

GAMES

DOWNLOADING NEW GAMES

To download games and applications from MEDIA CENTER:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Media Center and press the OK

Key. Select Games and press the OK Key.

2. Select Get New Applications and press the OK Key.

3. Choose the game you want to download from the list displayed on

the screen.

4. Once the application has downloaded, select Yes to run or No to

return to the Games menu.

All applicable charges or fees will be incurred to download the selec ted

application.

PLAYING DOWNLOADED GAMES

1. From the GAMES menu, select the game you downloaded and press

the OK Key [PLAY] to run the application.

Chapter 5 − Media Center

Media Center

MOBILE WEB

Now you can access news, sports, weather and Email from your phone. Mobile Web keeps you updated by providing access to up-to-date information such as news, sports, weather and stock quotes when you subscribe to Internet ser vice with your service provider. Stay connected to email, text and picture messaging, web, and wireless networks while you’re on the go in multiple data destinations around the world. Visit vzw.com/vzglobal for details.

1. To start your Internet browser and access websites through your

wireless handset, press the OK Key [MENU], select Media Center and press the OK Key. Select Mobile Web and press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the Directional Key up.

BROWSER MENU

The browser menu lists the actions necessary to operate the browser. To access press the Directional Key up and press the Right Soft Key [Menu].

VZW HOME Return to the home page.

ADD FAVORITE Takes the user to the Add to Favorites page.

For favorites, page name and URL need to auto-populate.

SEARCH Takes the user to the VZW Search page.

GO TO URL Takes the user to the VZW Search > Go to Site page.

SHOW URL Display the current URL.

BACK Return to the previously viewed page.

MANAGE MEMORY Displays the following options:

•

Clear Cache: Clears the cache.

•

Clear History: Clears the list of recently visited URLs.

•

Clear Cookies: Clears saved cookies.

•

Autofill: Automatically fills in character for browser recognized words.

SETTINGS

•

Downloads: S electing the Downloads item allows the user to enable/disable

downloading images, background sounds and object downloads when a URL is accessed.

Media Center − Chapter 5

Media Center

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 88-89090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 88-89 2009.6.11 2:58:13 PM2009.6.11 2:58:13 PM

•

Restar t Browser: Selecting Restart Browser causes the history and cache to be

cleared and returns the user to the homepage.

•

Scroll Mode: Selecting Scroll Mode from the Settings menu allows the user to

select the way text scrolls and the scroll speed.

•

Send Referrer: When the Send Referrer item is selected from the Settings menu,

the browser allows the user to turn on or off sending the referrer URL.

•

Key Press Time Out: When the Key Press Time Out item is selected from the

Settings menu, the browser allows the user to set the key press timeout to Fast,

Medium, Slow, or OFF. Medium is 1.5 seconds, slow 2 seconds and fast is 1 second. The key press timeout is the period of time after which the cursor auto-advances to the next entry position. In most cases, a single key can be used to enter more than one character. Each time the key is pressed the last character of the line is replaced by the next choice for that key. As long as the same key is repressed within key press timeout, the last character cycles between all the choices for the key.

•

Connection Time Out: When the Connection Time Out item is selected from the

Settings menu, the browser allows the user to set the connec tion timeout. The

connection timeout determines how long the browser will wait for a response from the network for a network request.

ADVANCED

•

About: Displays the name of the supplier of the Browser and the Browser SW

version.

•

Refresh: Allows the user to reload the current URL.

•

Histor y: Displays the 20 previously visited URLs.

•

Encr yption: Displays the following options.

1. Authentication: Gives the option to turn Authentication Caching, ON or OFF.

2. Root Certificate: Shows the root security keys for TLS.

3. Current Certificate: Shows the current site security key for TLS (if applicable).

EXIT

Press the END/PWR Key to exit out of the browser and return to idle mode.

BROWSE & DOWNLOAD

DOWNLOADING NEW APPLICATIONS

To download Tools that can help you navigate to entertainment spots, restaurants and provide you with up-to-date weather information:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Media Center and press the OK

Key. Select Browse & Download and press the OK Key.

2. Select one of the following options and press the OK Key.

•

Get New Applications: To connect to the Browse & Download server.

•

Backup Assistant: To connect to the Backup Assistant Smartlink.

•

Mobile Email: To connect to the Mobile Email Smartlink.

•

VZ Navigator: To connect to the VZ Navigator Smartlink.

Chapter 5 − Media Center

Media Center

3. Choose the application which you want to download from the list

displayed on the screen and follow the prompts.

EXTRAS

DOWNLOADING NEW APPLICATIONS

To download Applications:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Media Center and press the OK

Key. Select Extras and press the OK Key.

2. Select Get New Applications and press the OK Key.

3. Choose the application which you want to download from the list

displayed on the screen and follow the prompts.

MEDIA CENTER INFO

To view App. Memory, Phone Memory, View Log and Help information:

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select Media Center and press the OK

Key.

2. Press the Right Soft Key

[Info].

3. Select App. Memory, Phone Memory, View Log or Help and

press the OK Key.

4. Press the OK Key to return to the previous screen.

VZ NAVIGATOR

USING THE VZ NAVIGATOR

VZ Navigator — Now you can find the address of a great restaurant or the nearest

ATM. Check movie times. Discover the latest hot spots. And know exactly how to get where you’re going. VZ Navigator puts all the advanced features of the latest GPS devices and systems on your wireless device — at a fraction of the price.

VZ Navigator provides:

•

Heads-up, voice-prompted, turn-by-turn directions with auto-rerouting if you

miss a turn

•

Local search of nearly 14 million points of interest in the U.S.

•

Detailed color maps that can be quickly panned and zoomed With VZ Navigator,

you’ll know exactly where you are, what’s around you and how to get there.

Download, subscription, and airtime required for use; only in National Enhanced Services Coverage Area; accuracy and completeness of information is not guaranteed; information about location of device will be used to deliver ser vice.

1. Press the OK Key [MENU], select VZ Navigator and press the OK Key.

To use VZ Navigator, your phone’s location capability must first be enabled.

To turn Location On, see details on page 60.

Media Center − Chapter 5

Media Center

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 90-91090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 90-91 2009.6.11 2:58:14 PM2009.6.11 2:58:14 PM

Chapter 5 − Media Center

Media Center

MESSAGING MENU

CHAPTER 6

MESSAGING MENU

This chapter addresses Voicemail, TXT, Picture,

Voice Messaging functions including:

When a new message arrives

New message

Inbox

Sent

Messages

Drafts

Voicemail

Mobile IM

Chat

Erase messages

Settings

Changing this setting does not automatically enable retrieval of the

location of the phone, you must still grant VZ Navigator access to the location capability before it can acquire the phone’s location. The first time you run VZ Navigator, you will be prompted to grant this permission to the application.

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 92-93090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 92-93 2009.6.11 2:58:15 PM2009.6.11 2:58:15 PM

WHEN A NEW MESSAGE ARRIVES

1. The received message display appears when a new message arrives.

2. To display the message, select View Now and press the OK Key.

NEW MESSAGE

TXT MESSAGE

Verizon Wireless voice coverage is available in multiple destinations worldwide, so you’ll use one number wherever you travel. Plus, stay connected to email, text and picture messaging, web, and wireless networks while you’re on the go in multiple data destinations around the world. Visit vzw.com/vzglobal for details.

• The SIM card must be installed in order to send Text Messages in GSM

mode.

•

The SIM Card is pre-installed in your phone.

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message], select New Message and

press the OK Key. Select TXT Message and press the OK Key.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press the New TXT Message Key .

2. Enter the phone number and press the OK Key. Or press the Right Soft

Key [Add] to access the following options.

•

From Contacts: Search for a phone number which is stored in the contacts

list.

•

Recent Calls: Search for a phone number which is stored in the recent

calls list.

•

Groups: Search the groups stored in the contacts list.

•

To Contacts: S ave the number or email you’ve entered to the contacts list,

when you enter the number.

3. Press the Right Soft Key [Options] to access the following

options.

•

Insert Quick Text: Inserts already written sentences in TXT message.

•

Save As Draft: Save the TXT message.

•

Add: Attach Graphic, Sound, Name Card.

•

Format Text: Edit the Alignment, Font Size, Font Style, Font Color and

Background Color.

•

Priority Level: Set the level of the priority to High or Normal.

•

Cancel Message: Cancel message.

4. Enter the message and press the OK Key [SEND].

As long as one field is complete in the TXT Message, the message will be

saved in the Draft box.

Chapter 6 − Messaging Menu

Messaging

PICTURE MESSAGE

• The SIM card must be installed in order to send Picture Messages in

GSM mode.

•

The SIM Card is pre-installed in your phone.

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message], select New Message and

press the OK Key. Select Picture Message and press the OK Key.

2. Enter the phone number and press the OK Key. Or press the Right Soft

Key

[Add] to access the following options.

•

From Contacts: Search for a phone number which is stored in the contacts

list.

•

Recent Calls: Search for a phone number which is stored in the recent calls

list.

•

Groups: Search the groups stored in the contacts list.

•

To Online Album: Send picture message by using online address.

•

To Contacts: S ave the number or email you’ve entered to the contacts list,

when you enter the number.

3. Enter the message in the Text field.

4. Select Picture and press the Left Soft Key

[My Pics]. Select the

desired picture and press the OK Key to select. You can only send one picture file at a time.

5. Select Sound and press the Left Soft Key

[Sounds]. Select the

desired sound and press the OK Key to select. You can only send one sound file at a time.

6. Select Subject and write the subject.

7. Select Name Card. Press the Left Soft Key

[Add] and select My

Name Card or Contacts and press the OK Key. Select the card or the

contact and press the OK Key.

8. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options] to access the following

options.

•

Preview: Preview a written Picture Message.

•

Save As Draft: Save the Picture Message.

•

Add Quick Text: Inserts already written sentences in Picture Message.

•

Add Slide: Add another message.

•

Priority Level: Set the level of the priority to High or Normal.

•

Remove Picture: Remove inserted picture in Picture field.

•

Remove Slide: Remove inserted Slide Message.

•

Remove Sound: Remove inserted sound in Sound field.

•

Remove Name Card: Remove inserted name card in Name Card field.

•

Cancel Message: Cancel message.

9. Press the OK Key [SEND].

Messaging Menu − Chapter 6

Messaging

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 94-95090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 94-95 2009.6.11 2:58:17 PM2009.6.11 2:58:17 PM

As long as one field is complete in Pic ture Message, the message will be

saved in the Draft box.

VOICE MESSAGE

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message], select New Message and

press the OK Key. Select Voice Message and press the OK Key.

2. To record a new Voice Message, press the OK Key to start recording.

Press the OK Key [STOP] to stop recording and save it.

3. Enter the phone number and press the OK Key. Or press the Right Soft

Key

[Add] to access the following options.

•

From Contacts: Search for a phone number which is stored in the contacts

list.

•

Recent Calls: Search for a phone number which is stored in the recent calls

list.

•

Groups: Search the groups stored in the contacts list.

•

To Contacts: S ave the number or email you’ve entered to the contacts list,

when you enter the number.

4. From the Voice field, you can re-record the message by pressing

the Left Soft Key [Record]. You can only send one voice file at a time.

5. Select Text and enter the message.

6. Select Subject and write the subject.

7. Select the Name Card field. Press the Left Soft Key

[Add] and

select My Name Card or Contac ts and press the OK Key. Select the card or the contact and press the OK Key.

8. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options] to access the following

options.

•

Review: Review a written Voice Message.

•

Save As Draft: Save the Voice Message.

•

Add Quick Text: Inserts already written sentences in the message.

•

Priority Level: Set the level of the priority to High or Normal.

•

Remove Recording: Remove inserted recorded voice memo in Voice field.

•

Remove Name Card: Remove inserted name card in Name Card field.

•

Cancel Message: Cancel message.

9. Press the OK Key [SEND].

As long as one field is complete in the Voice Message, the message will be

saved in the Draft box.

Chapter 6 − Messaging Menu

Messaging

INBOX

The Inbox manages received messages. To access:

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message], select Inbox and press

the OK Key.

2. Select a message and press the OK Key [OPEN]. To delete a

message, press the Left Soft Key

[Erase] and press the OK Key

to select Yes . With the message opened, press the Right Soft Key

[Options] to access the following options.

•

Play Again: Play a received Picture or Voice message.

•

Erase: Erase an inbox message.

•

Reply w. Copy: Reply with the original message included.

•

Forward: Forward the TXT, Picture or Voice message.

•

Save Picture (MMS Picture): Save a picture to the My Pictures folder.

•

Save As Ringtone (MMS Sound): Save a sound to the My Ringtones folder.

•

Save Sound (MMS Sound): Save a sound to the My Sounds folder.

•

Save Objects (EMS Save Objects): Save a graphic, sound, name card.

•

Save Name Card: Save a name card to the contacts.

•

Save Quick Text: Save received text msg to Quick Text.

•

Lock/Unlock: Locks or unlock the TXT, Picture or Voice message.

•

Add To Contacts: Save a number to contacts.

•

Extract Addresses: Extract all phone numbers, Email addresses and URLs

from the received message.

•

Message Info: Show received TXT, Picture or Voice message information.

SENT

Manages TXT, Picture and Voice messages already sent or waiting to be sent.

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message], select Sent and press the

OK Key.

2. Select a message and press the OK Key [OPEN]. To delete a

message, press the Left Soft Key

[Erase] and press the OK Key

to select Yes .

3. With the message opened, press the Right Soft Key

[Options]

to access the following options.

•

Play Again: Play a received Picture or Voice message.

•

Forward: Forward the TXT, Picture or Voice message.

•

Lock/Unlock: Locks or unlock the TXT, Picture or Voice message.

•

Save Quick Text: Save sent text message to quick text.

•

Add To Contacts: Save number to contacts.

•

Erase: Erase a sent message.

•

View Name Card: View included name card with in message.

•

Message Info: Show sent TXT, Picture or Voice message information.

Messaging Menu − Chapter 6

Messaging

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 96-97090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 96-97 2009.6.11 2:58:19 PM2009.6.11 2:58:19 PM

MESSAGES

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message], select Messages and press

the OK Key.

2. Select the contact name to view and press OK Key.

The latest message will be shown.

3. Press the Directional Key right to view the next message.

4. With the message opened, press the Right Soft Key

[Options]

to access the following options.

•

Forward: Forward the TXT, Picture or Voice message.

•

Lock/Unlock: Locks or unlock the TXT, Picture or Voice message.

•

Save Quick Text: Save sent text message to quick text.

•

Add To Contacts: Save number to contacts.

•

Message Info: Show sent TXT, Picture or Voice message information.

DRAFTS

The Drafts folder contains any draft messages or saved messages. If a message was interrupted by a voice call or other interrupting event, the message will automatically be saved here.

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message], select Drafts and press

the OK Key.

2. Select a message to edit and press the OK Key [EDIT].

Edit the message.

3. To delete a message, press the Left Soft Key

[Erase] and press

the OK Key to select Ye s.

4. Press the Right Soft Key

[Options] to access the following

options.

•

Send: Send a selected message.

•

Lock/Unlock: Locks or unlock the TXT, Picture or Voice message.

•

Add To Contacts: Save number to contacts.

•

Erase Drafts: Erase all drafts messages.

VOICEMAIL

New voicemail alerts are sent by your network. These messages indicate how many new and urgent voicemails are in your voicemail box.

WHEN A NEW VOICEMAIL ARRIVES

When you receive a new voicemail message you’ll hear a sound and a Voicemail icon appears in the display.

1. Select Listen Now and press the OK Key to access your voicemail

box.

Chapter 6 − Messaging Menu

Messaging

2. Select Listen Later and press the OK Key to ignore the voicemail

message and return to idle mode.

TO ACCESS YOUR VOICE MAILBOX

1. To dial your voicemail box directly, press , ,

and then press the SEND Key

. Press the Left Soft Key

[Message], select Voicemail and press the OK Key then press the OK Key [CALL] to dial.

Shortcut: In idle mode, press and hold to access Voicemail.

One Touch Dial must be enabled, please see page 66 for details.

2. Follow the prompts to enter your password and listen your messages.

MOBILE IM

LAUNCHING MOBILE IM

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message], select Mobile IM and press

the OK Key.

2. When you access this application for the first time, an Accept/

Decline screen will appear. Select Accept and press the Left Soft Key

[Accept]. Or press the OK Key.

3. Select either AIM, WL Messenger or Yahoo!® and press the OK Key.

4. Enter your Login ID and Password and press the OK Key [Sign In].

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message], select Email and press the

OK Key.

2. Select one of the following options and press the OK Key.

•

Mobile Email: To connect Brew Smartlink.

•

Mobile Web Mail: To connect WAP Browser.

3. The Browser launches.

4. Select the desired Email provider and press the OK Key.

5. Follow the on-screen prompts and functions.

CHAT

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message], select Chat and press the

OK Key.

2. The Browser launches.

Messaging Menu − Chapter 6

Messaging

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 98-99090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 98-99 2009.6.11 2:58:21 PM2009.6.11 2:58:21 PM

3. Select one of the displayed chat rooms and press the Left Soft Key

[Select].

4. Follow the on-screen prompts and functions.

ERASE MESSAGES

To erase all messages stored in your Inbox, Drafts or Sent folders:

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message] and then press the Right Soft

Key

[Options].

•

Erase Inbox: Erase all messages or only read messages stored in the Inbox.

•

Erase Sent: Erase all messages stored in Sent Folder.

•

Erase Drafts: Erase all messages stored in the Drafts folder.

•

Erase All: Erase all messages or all except unread messages stored in the

Inbox, Sent and Drafts folders.

2. Select Yes to erase the selected messages and press the OK Key.

Locked messages cannot be erased.

SETTINGS

To configure received message settings:

1. Press the Left Soft Key [Message] and then press the Left Soft

Key [Settings].

2. Select one of the settings below and press the OK Key to select it.

MESSAGES VIEW

1. Select Time or Contact and press the OK Key.

•

Time: All received and sent messages are stored in the Inbox and Sent

folders.

•

Contact: All received and sent messages are stored in each of the contacts

name folders.

ENTRY MODE

Set a default entry mode. For example, if Abc mode is the default, its icon will appear.

1. Select T9 Word, Abc, ABC or 123 and press the OK Key.

AUTO SAVE SENT

1. Select On, Off or Prompt and press the OK Key.

100

Chapter 6 − Messaging Menu

Messaging

•

On: All sent messages saved in the Sent box.

•

Off: All sent messages not saved in the Sent box.

•

Prompt: Dialogue box displayed after sent message.

AUTO ERASE INBOX

Automatically erases the oldest read inbox message when a new message arrives.

1. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

•

On: The oldest read message is erased from the Inbox automatically when

the Inbox is full.

•

Off: The oldest read message is not erased from the Inbox automatically

even though the Inbox is full.

MESSAGING FONT SIZE

1. Select Normal or Large and press the OK Key.

TXT AUTO VIEW

1. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

•

On: The TXT message is displayed automatically when a new message

arrives.

•

Off: View a new text message by entering the Inbox or responding to the

new message notification.

MULTIMEDIA AUTO RECEIVE

1. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

•

On: Picture/Voice messages download automatically.

•

Off: Picture/Voice messages must be retrieved from the Inbox

or at the new Picture/Voice message prompt.

QUICK TEXT

To create a new quick text or edit the quick text you have saved:

1. Select a quick text from the list and press the OK Key [EDIT].

2. To add a new quick text, press the Right Soft Key

[Options] to

select New. Enter the new text and press the OK Key [SAVE].

3. To move the saved quick text, press the Right Soft Key

[Options] and select Move by pressing the OK Key. Select the desired location and press the OK Key [SAVE].

4. To erase a saved quick text, press the Left Soft Key

[Erase].

Press the OK Key to select Yes .

Messaging Menu − Chapter 6

101

Messaging

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 100-101090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 100-101 2009.6.11 2:58:22 PM2009.6.11 2:58:22 PM

102

Chapter 6 − Messaging Menu

Messaging

SAFETY AND WARRANTY

CHAPTER 7

SAFETY AND WARRANTY

This chapter addresses the safety guidelines and precautions to follow when

operating your phone. Before operating your phone, please be aware of all the

safety details. This chapter contains the warranty for your phone.

Please review this manual thoroughly.

Safety information for wireless handheld phones

Safety information for FCC RF exposure

SAR information

Hearing aid compatibility (HAC) for wireless telecommunications devices

FDA consumer update Avoid potential hearing loss. FCC compliance information

CTIA batery cer tification requirements

12 month limited warranty

Index

VOICEMAIL#

1. Enter a new voicemail number or edit the voicemail number and

press the OK Key.

CALLBACK #

Edit a default callback number so that the recipient can callback or reply.

1. Select On or Off and press the OK Key.

2. If On is selected, input a new callback number and press the OK Key.

SIGNATURE

Create a signature that can be inserted at the end of a TXT, Picture or Voice Message.

1. To deactivate Signature, select None and press the OK Key.

2. To input a Signature, select Custom. Enter your signature in the

text box and press the OK Key.

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 102-103090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 102-103 2009.6.11 2:58:23 PM2009.6.11 2:58:23 PM

SAFETY INFORMATION FOR WIRELESS HANDHELD PHONES

READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING YOUR HANDHELD PORTABLE CELLULAR TELEPHONE

EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY SIGNALS

Your wireless handheld portable telephone is a low power radio transmitter and receiver. When it is ON, it receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.

In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commissions (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for handheld wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies:

ANSI C95.1 (1992) * NCRP Report 86 (1986) * ICNIRP (1996) *

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. For example, over 120 scientists, engineers and physicians from universities, government health agencies and industry reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C951).

The design of your phone complies with the FCC guidelines (and those standards).

1* : American National Standards Institute. 2* : National Council on Radiation protection and measurements. 3* : International Commission on Nonionizing Radiation Protection.

ANTENNA SAFETY

Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications or attachments could impair call quality, damage the phone or result in violation of FCC regulations. Please contact your local dealer for replacement antenna.

Do not use the phone with a damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact with the skin, a minor burn may result. Please contac t your local dealer for replacement antenna.

DRIVING SAFETY

Talking on the phone while driving is extremely dangerous and is illegal in some states. Remember, safety comes first. Check the laws and regulations on the use of phones in the areas where you drive. Always obey them. Also, if using your phone while driving, please:

•

Give full attention to driving. Driving safely is your first responsibility.

•

Use hands-free operation, if available.

•

Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call, if driving conditions

so require.

104

Chapter 7 − Safety and Warranty

Safety

If you must use the phone while driving, please use one -touch, speed dialing and auto answer modes.

An airbag inflates with great force. DO NOT place objects, including both installed or portable wireless equipment, in the area over the airbag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.

WARNING: Failure to follow these instructions may lead to serious personal injury and

possible property damage.

ELECTRONIC DEVICES

Your wireless handheld portable telephone is a low power radio transmitter and receiver. When it is ON, it receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.

Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from RF energy. However, certain electronic equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless phone. Therefore, use of your phone must be restricted in certain situations.

PACEMAKERS

The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends that a minimum separation of six (6”) inches be maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers:

•

ALWAYS keep the phone more than six inches from your pacemaker when the

phone is turned on.

•

Do not carry the phone in a breast pocket.

•

Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference.

•

If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, turn your

phone OFF immediately.

HEARING AIDS

Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your service provider (or call the customer service line to discuss alternatives).

OTHER MEDICAL DEVICES

If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufac turer of your device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information.

Turn your phone OFF in healthcare facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or healthcare facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy.

VEHICLES

RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded elec tronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its representative regarding

Safety and Warranty − Chapter 7

105

Safety

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 104-105090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 104-105 2009.6.11 2:58:25 PM2009.6.11 2:58:25 PM

your vehicle. You should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added to your vehicle.

POSTED FACILITIES

Turn your phone OFF where posted notices so require.

OTHER SAFETY GUIDELINES

AIRCRAFT

FCC regulations prohibit using your phone while in the air. Turn your phone OFF before boarding an aircraft. Always request and obtain prior consent and approval of an authorized airline representative before using your phone aboard an aircraft. Always follow the instructions of the airline representative whenever using your phone aboard an aircraft, to prevent any possible interference with airborne electronic equipment.

BLASTING AREAS

To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn your phone OFF when in a “blasting area” or in areas posted: “Turn off two-way radio.” Obey all signs and instructions.

POTENTIALLY EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES

Turn your phone OFF when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire

resulting in bodily injury or even death. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly

marked. They include fueling areas such as gas stations; below deck on boats; fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or par ticles, such as grain, dust or metal powders; and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle’s engine.

PRECAUTIONS

Your Handheld Portable Telephone is a high quality piece of equipment. Before operating, read all instructions and cautionary markings on (1) AC/DC Travel Adaptor (2) Battery and (3) Product Using Battery.

Failure to follow the directions below could result in serious bodily injury and/or property damage due to battery liquid leakage, fire or rupture.

•

DO NOT keep your mobile phone and its accessories in reach of children and pets.

•

DO NOT use this equipment in an extreme environment where high temperature

or high humidity exists.

•

DO NOT try to dry your phone in a microwave oven.

•

DO NOT abuse the equipment. Avoid striking, shaking or shocking. When not

using, lay down the unit to avoid possible damage due to instability.

•

DO NOT expose this equipment to rain or spilled beverages.

•

DO NOT use unauthorized accessories.

•

DO NOT disassemble the phone or its accessories. If service or repair is required,

106

Chapter 7 − Safety and Warranty

Safety

return the unit to an authorized PCD cellular service center. If the unit is disassembled, the risk of electric shock or fire may result.

•

DO NOT short-circuit the battery terminals with metal items etc.

SAFETY INFORMATION FOR FCC RF EXPOSURE

WARNING! READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING

CAUTIONS

In August 1996 the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the United States with its action in Report and Order FCC 96-326 adopted an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated transmitters. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standard previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies. The design of this phone complies with the FCC guidelines and these international standards.

BODYWORN OPERATION

This device was tested for typical body-worn operations with the back of the phone kept 2 cm. from the body. To maintain compliance requirements, use only belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that maintain a 2 cm separation distance between the user’s Body and the back of the phone, including the antenna. The use of belt-clips, holsters and similar accessories should not contain metallic components in its assembly. The use of accessories that do not satisfy these requirements may not comply with FCC RF exposure requirements and should be avoided.

For more information about RF exposure, please visit the FCC website at www.fcc.gov.

SAR INFORMATION

THIS MODEL PHONE MEETS THE GOVERNMENT’S REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES.

Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health.

The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/ kg. * Tests for SAR are conducted with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output.

Safety and Warranty − Chapter 7

107

Safety

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 106-107090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 106-107 2009.6.11 2:58:26 PM2009.6.11 2:58:26 PM

Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the ear is 1.29 W/Kg and when worn on the body, is 1.33 W/Kg. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements). While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement for safe exposure.

The SAR testing for Body-worn operation was performed with a belt clip that provided a 20mm separation. The User’s Manual indicates that any holsters/clips used with this device should contain no metallic components.

The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea after searching on PP4ZEPHYR.

Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) web-site at http://www.wow-com.com.

* In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the

public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a sub-stantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements.

HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY HAC FOR WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEVICES

PCD’S COMMITMENT

PCD believes that all of our customers should be able to enjoy the benefits of digital wireless technologies. We are committed to providing a selection of compatible devices for our customers who wear hearing aids.

THIS PHONE HAS A HAC RATING OF M3

WHAT IS HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY?

The Federal Communications Commission has implemented rules and a rating system designed to enable people who wear hearing aids to more effec tively use these wireless telecommunications devices. The standard for compatibility of digital wireless phones with hearing aids is set for th in American National Standard Institute (ANSI) standard C63.19. There are two sets of ANSI standards with ratings from one to four (four being the best rating): an “M” rating for reduced interference making it easier to hear conversations on the phone when using the hearing aid microphone, and a “T” rating that enables the phone to be used with hearing aids operating in the telecoil mode thus reducing unwanted background noise.

108

Chapter 7 − Safety and Warranty

Safety

HOW WILL I KNOW WHICH WIRELESS PHONES ARE HEARING AID COMPATIBLE?

The Hearing Aid Compatibility rating is displayed on the wireless phone box.

A phone is considered Hearing Aid Compatible for acoustic coupling (microphone mode) if it has an “M3” or “M4” rating. A digital wireless phone is considered Hearing Aid Compatible for inductive coupling (telecoil mode) if it has a “T3” or “T4” rating.

HOW WILL I KNOW IF MY HEARING AID WILL WORK WITH A PARTICULAR DIGITAL WIRELESS PHONE?

You’ll want to try a number of wireless phones so that you can decide which works the best with your hearing aids.

You may also want to talk with your hearing aid professional about the extent to which your hearing aids are immune to interference, if they have wireless phone shielding, and whether your hearing aid has a HAC rating.

FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT HEARING AIDS AND DIGITAL WIRELESS PHONES:

•

FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility and Volume Control –

http://www.fcc.gov/cgb/dro/hearing.html

•

Hearing Loss Association of America –

http://www.hearingloss.org/learn/cellphonetech.asp

•

CTIA – http://www.accesswireless.org/hearingaid/

•

Gallaudet University, RERC – http://tap.gallaudet.edu/voice

FDA CONSUMER UPDATE

U.S. FOOD AND DRUG ADMINISTRATION  CENTER FOR DEVICES AND RADIOLOGICAL HEALTH CONSUMER UPDATE ON WIRELESS PHONES

1. Do wireless phones pose a health hazard?

The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using wireless phones. There is no proof, however, that wireless phones are absolutely safe. Wireless phones emit low levels of radiofrequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of RF when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low level RF exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some bio logical effects may occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. In some cases, other researchers have had difficulty in reproducing those studies or in determining the reasons for inconsistent results.

Safety and Warranty − Chapter 7

109

Safety

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 108-109090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 108-109 2009.6.11 2:58:27 PM2009.6.11 2:58:27 PM

2. What is FDA’s role concerning the safety of wireless phones?

Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting consumer products such as wireless phones before they can be sold, as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency has authority to take action if wireless phones are shown to emit radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level that is hazardous to the user. In such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of wireless phones to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the phones so that the hazard no longer exists. Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory actions, FDA has urged the wireless phone industry to take a number of steps, including the following:

•

Suppor t needed research into possible biological effects of RF of the t ype emitted

by wireless phones;

•

Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the user that

is not necessary for device function;

and

•

Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best possible informa-

tion on possible effects of wireless phone use on human health.

FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure coordinated efforts at the federal level. The following agencies belong to this working group:

•

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

•

Environmental Protection Agency

•

Federal Communications Commission

•

Occupational S afety and Health Administration

•

National Telecommunications and Information Administration

The National Institutes of Health participates in some inter-agency working group activities, as well. FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless phones with the Federal Communications Commission (FCC). All phones that are sold in the United States must comply with FCC safety guidelines that limit RF exposure. FCC relies on FDA and other health agencies for safety questions about wireless phones. FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless phone networks rely upon. While these base stations operate at higher power than do the wireless phones themselves, the RF exposures that people get from these base stations are typically thousands of times lower than those they can get from wireless phones. Base stations are thus not the subject of the safety questions discussed in this document.

3. What kinds of phones are the subject of this update?

The term “wireless phone” refers here to hand-held wireless phones with built-in antennas, often called “cell,” “mobile,” or “PCS” phones. These types of wireless phones can expose the user to measurable radiofrequency energy (RF) because of the short distance between the phone and the user’s head. These RF exposures are limited by Federal Communications Commission safety guidelines that were developed with the advice of FDA and other federal health and safety agencies. When the phone is located at greater distances from the user, the exposure to RF is drastically lower because a person’s RF exposure decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the source. The so-called “cordless phones,” which have a base unit connected

110

Chapter 7 − Safety and Warranty

Safety

to the telephone wiring in a house, typically operate at far lower power levels and thus produce RF exposures far below the FCC safety limits.

4. What are the results of the research done already?

The research done thus far has produced conflicting results and many studies have suffered from flaws in their research methods. Animal experiments investigating the effects of radiofrequency energy (RF) exposures characteristic of wireless phones have yielded conflicting results that often cannot be repeated in other laboratories. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory animals.

However, many of the studies that showed increased tumor development used animals that had been genetically engineered or treated with cancer-causing chemicals so as to be predisposed to develop cancer in the absence of RF exposure. Other studies exposed the animals to RF for up to 22 hours per day. These conditions are not similar to the conditions under which people use wireless phones, so we don’t know with certainty what the results of such studies mean for human health. Three large epidemiology studies have been published since December

2000. Between them, the studies investigated any possible association between the use of wireless phones and primary brain cancer, glioma, meningioma or acoustic neu-roma, tumors of the brain or salivary gland, leukemia or other cancers. None of the studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful health effects from wireless phone RF exposures. However, none of the studies can answer questions about long-term exposures, since the average period of phone use in these studies was around three years.

5. What research is needed to decide whether RF exposure from wireless phones poses a health risk?

A combination of laboratory studies and epidemiological studies of people actually using wireless phones would provide some of the data that are needed. Lifetime animal exposure studies could be completed in a few years. However, very large numbers of animals would be needed to provide reliable proof of a cancer promoting effect if one exists. Epidemiological studies can provide data that is directly applicable to human populations, but 10 or more years’ follow-up may be needed to provide answers about some health effects, such as cancer. This is because the interval between the time of exposure to a cancer-causing agent and the time tumors develop - if they do - may be many, many years. The interpretation of epidemiological studies is hampered by difficulties in measuring actual RF exposure during dayto-day use of wireless phones. Many factors affect this measurement, such as the angle at which the phone is held or which model of phone is used.

6. What is FDA doing to find out more about the possible health effects of wireless phone RF?

FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with groups of investigators around the world to ensure that high priority animal studies are conducted to address important questions about the effects of exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its inception in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the development of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven the establishment of new research programs

Safety and Warranty − Chapter 7

111

Safety

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 110-111090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 110-111 2009.6.11 2:58:28 PM2009.6.11 2:58:28 PM

around the world. The Project has also helped develop a series of public information documents on EMF issues. FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety. FDA provides the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts in government, industry and academic organizations. CTIA-funded research is conducted through contracts to independent investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory studies and studies of wireless phone users. The CRADA will also include a broad assessment of additional research needs in the context of the latest research developments around the world.

7. How can I find out how much radiofrequenc y energy exposure I can get by using my wireless phone?

All phones sold in the United States must comply with Federal Communications Commission (FCC) guidelines that limit radiofrequency energy (RF) exposures. FCC established these guidelines in consultation with FDA and the other federal health and safety agencies. The FCC limit for RF exposure from wireless telephones is set at a Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg). The FCC limit is consistent with the safety standards developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering (IEEE) and the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement. The exposure limit takes into consideration the body’s ability to remove heat from the tissues that absorb energy from the wireless phone and is set well below levels known to have effects. Manufacturers of wireless phones must report the RF exposure level for each model of phone to the FCC. The FCC website (http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety) gives directions for locating the FCC identifica-

tion number on your phone so you can find your phone’s RF exposure level in the online listing.

8. What has FDA done to measure the radiofrequency energy coming from wireless phones ?

The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) is developing a technical standard for measuring the radiofrequency energy (RF) exposure from wireless phones and other wireless handsets with the participation and leadership of FDA scientists and engineers. The standard, “Recommended Practice for Determining the Spatial-Peak Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) in the Human Body D ue to Wireless Communications Devices: Experimental Techniques,” sets forth the first consistent test methodology for measuring the rate at which RF is deposited in the heads of wireless phone users. The test method uses a tissue-simulating model of the human head. Standardized SAR test methodology is expected to greatly improve the consistency of measurements made at different laboratories on the same phone. SAR is the measurement of the amount of energy absorbed in tissue, either by the whole body or a small part of the body. It is measured in watts/kg (or milliwatts/g) of matter. This measurement is used to determine whether a wireless phone complies with safety guidelines.

9. What steps can I take to reduce my exposure to radiofrequenc y energy from my wireless phone?

If there is a risk from these products—and at this point we do not know that there is—it is probably very small. But if you are concerned about avoiding even potential

112

Chapter 7 − Safety and Warranty

Safety

risks, you can take a few simple steps to minimize your exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). Since time is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives, reducing the amount of time spent using a wireless phone will reduce RF exposure.

•

If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless phone every day, you

could place more distance between your body and the source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with distance.

For example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless phone away from your body or use a wireless phone connected to a remote antenna. Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless phones are harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF exposure from these products, you can use measures like those described above to reduce your RF exposure from wireless phone use.

10. What about children using wireless phones?

The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless phones, including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to lower exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures described above would apply to children and teenagers using wireless phones. Reducing the time of wireless phone use and increasing the distance between the user and the RF source will reduce RF exposure. Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised that children be discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For example, the government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets containing such a recommendation in December 2000. They noted that no evidence exists that using a wireless phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit wireless

phone use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.

11. What about wireless phone interference with medical equipment?

Radiofrequency energy (RF) from wireless phones can interact with some elec tronic devices. For this reason, FDA helped develop a detailed test method to measure electromagnetic interference (EMI) of implanted cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators from wireless telephones. This test method is now part of a standard sponsored by the Association for the Advancement of Medical instrumentation (AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical device manufacturers and many other groups, was completed in late 2000. This standard will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wireless phone EMI. FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless phones and helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). This standard specifies test methods and performance requirements for hearing aids and wireless phones so that no interference occurs when a person uses a “compatible” phone and a “compatible” hearing aid at the same time. This standard was approved by the IEEE in 2000. FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless phones for possible interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful interference be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to assess the interference and work to resolve the problem.

Safety and Warranty − Chapter 7

113

Safety

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 112-113090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 112-113 2009.6.11 2:58:28 PM2009.6.11 2:58:28 PM

12. Where can I find additional information?

For additional information, please refer to the following resources:

•

FDA web page on wireless phones

(http://www.fda.gov/cellphones)

•

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) RF Safet y Program

(http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety)

•

International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection

(http://www.icnirp.de)

•

World Health Organization ( WHO) International EMF Project

(http://www.who.int/emf)

•

National R adiological Protection Board (UK) (http://www.hpa.org.uk/radiation/)

AVOID POTENTIAL HEARING LOSS.

Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and cellular telephones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use of headphones (including headsets, earbuds and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear), hypersensitivity to sound and distorted hearing. Individual susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and other potential hearing problems varies.

The amount of sound produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the sound, the device, the device settings and the headphones. You should follow some commonsense recommendations when using any portable audio device:

•

Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at which you

can hear adequately.

•

When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people

speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are listening to.

•

Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you choose to listen

to your portable device in a noisy environment, use noise- cancelling headphones to block out background environmental noise.

•

Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time is required

before your hearing could be affected.

•

Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such as rock

concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.

•

Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you experience ringing

in your ears, hear muffled speech or experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.

114

Chapter 7 − Safety and Warranty

Safety

YOU CAN OBTAIN ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON THIS SUBJECT FROM THE FOLLOWING SOURCES:

American Academy of Audiology

11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300 Reston, VA 20190 Voice: 800-AAA-2336, 703-790-8466 Email: info@audiology.org Internet: www.audiology.org

National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders National Institutes of Health

31 Center Drive, MSC 2320 Bethesda, MD USA 20892-2320 Voice: (301) 496-7243 Email: nidcdinfo@nidcd.nih.gov Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/health/hearing

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

1600 Clifton Rd. Atlanta, GA 30333, USA 1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636) TTY: 1-888-232-6348 E-mail: cdcinfo@cdc.gov Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.html

FCC COMPLIANCE INFORMATION

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference received.

Including interference that may cause undesired operation.

INFORMATION TO THE USER

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful Interference in a residential installation This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if Not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful Interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular Installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

•

Connect the equipment into an outlet of a circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

Safety and Warranty − Chapter 7

115

Safety

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 114-115090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 114-115 2009.6.11 2:58:29 PM2009.6.11 2:58:29 PM

•

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance.

CAUTION: Changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for

Compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Connecting of peripherals requires the use of grounded shielded signal cables.

CTIA BATERY CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

•

Do not disassemble or open crush, bend or deform, puncture or shred.

•

Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects into the

battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids, expose to fire, explosion or other hazard.

•

Only use the battery for the system for which it is specified.

•

Only use the battery with a charging system that has been qualified with the

system per this standard. Use of an unqualified battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage or other hazard.

•

Do not short circuit a battery or allow metallic conductive objects to contact

battery terminals.

•

Replace the battery only with another battery that has been qualified with the

system per this standard, IEEE-Std-1725-2006. Use of an unqualified battery may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage or other hazard.

•

Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local regulations.

•

Batter y usage by children should be supervised.

•

Avoid dropping the phone or battery. If the phone or battery is dropped,

especially on a hard surface and the user suspects damage, take it to a service

center for inspection.

•

Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion or other hazard.

•

For those host devices that utilize a USB port as a charging source, the host

device's user manual shall include a statement that the phone shall only be connected to products that bear the USB-IF logo or have completed the USB-IF compliance program.

116

Chapter 7 − Safety and Warranty

Safety

12 MONTH LIMITED WARRANTY

PCD Personal Communications (the Company) warrants to the original retail purchaser of this PCD handheld portable cellular telephone, that should this product or any part thereof during normal consumer usage and conditions, be proven defective in material or workmanship that results in product failure within the first t welve (12) month period from the date of purchase, such defect(s) will be repaired or replaced (with new or rebuilt parts) at the Company’s option, without charge for parts or labor directly related to the defec t(s).

The antenna, keypad, display, rechargeable battery and battery charger, if included, are similarly warranted for twelve (12) months from date of purchase.

This Warranty extends only to consumers who purchase the product in the United States or Canada and it is not transferable or assignable.

This Warranty does not apply to: (a) Product subjected to abnormal use or conditions, accident, mishandling, neglect,

unauthorized alteration, misuse, improper installation or repair or improper storage;

(b) Product whose mechanical serial number or electronic serial number has been

removed, altered or defaced.

environmental conditions;

(d) Damage resulting from connection to or use of any accessory or other product

not approved or authorized by the Company;

(e) Defects in appearance, cosmetic, decorative or structural items such as framing

and non-operative parts;

(f) Product damaged from external causes such as fire, flooding, dirt, sand, weather

conditions, battery leakage, blown fuse, theft or improper usage of any electrical source.

The Company disclaims liability for removal or reinstallation of the product, for geographic coverage, for inadequate signal reception by the antenna or for communications range or operation of the cellular system as a whole.

When sending your wireless device to PCD Personal Communications for repair or service, please note that any personal data or software stored on the device may be inadvertently erased or altered. Therefore, we strongly recommend you make a back up copy of all data and software contained on your device before submitting it for repair or service. This includes all contact lists, downloads (i.e. third-party software applications, ringtones, games and graphics) and any other data added to your device. In addition, if your wireless device utilizes a SIM or Multimedia card, please remove the card before submitting the device and store for later use when your device is returned, PCD Personal Communications is not responsible for and does not guarantee restoration of any third-party software, personal information or memory data contained in, stored on or integrated with any wireless device, whether under warranty or not, returned to PCD Personal Communications for repair or service.

To obtain repairs or replacement within the terms of this Warranty, the product should be delivered with proof of Warranty coverage (e.g. dated bill of sale), the

Safety and Warranty − Chapter 7

117

Warranty

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 116-117090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 116-117 2009.6.11 2:58:30 PM2009.6.11 2:58:30 PM

consumer’s return address, daytime phone number and/or fax number and complete description of the problem, transportation prepaid, to the Company at the address shown below or to the place of purchase for repair or replacement processing. In addition, for reference to an authorized Warranty station in your area, you may telephone in the United States (800) 229-1235 and in Canada (800) 465-9672 (in Ontario call 416-695-3060).

THE EXTENT OF THE COMPANY’S LIABILITY UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT PROVIDED ABOVE AND, IN NO EVENT, SHALL THE COMPANY’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY PURCHASER FOR THE PRODUCT.

ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY. ANY ACTION FOR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY MUST BE BROUGHT WITHIN A PERIOD OF 18 MONTHS FROM DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE. IN NO CASE SHALL THE COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR AN SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WHATSOEVER. THE COMPANY SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE DELAY IN RENDERING SERVICE UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR LOSS OF USE DURING THE TIME THE PRODUCT IS BEING REPAIRED OR REPLACED.

No person or representative is authorized to assume for the Company any liability other than expressed herein in connection with the sale of this product.

Some states or provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damage so the above limitation or exclusions may not apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights, which vary from state to state or province to province.

IN USA: PCD Personal Communications

555 Wireless Blvd. Hauppauge, NY 11788 (800) 229-1235

IN CANADA: PCD Canada Company

5535 Eglinton Avenue West Suite# 234 Toronto, ON M9C 5K5 (800) 465-9672

118

Chapter 7 − Safety and Warranty

Warranty

ACCESSING THE MENU 18 ADJUSTING THE VOLUME 24

ADJUSTING THE MASTER VOLUME 24 ADJUSTING THE VOLUME DURING A CALL 25

ALARM CLOCK 78

SETTING THE ALARM 78 TURNING ON/OFF THE ALARM 78 RESETTING THE ALARM 78 RESET ALL ALARM SETTINGS 79

ANSWERING CALLS 22 AVAILABLE OPTIONS DURING A CALL 25

BATTERY HANDLING INFORMATION 13 BLUETOOTH 45

BLUETOOTH ON/OFF 45 ADD NEW DEVICE 45 BLUETOOTH OPTIONS 46 BLUETOOTH SETTINGS 47

MY PHONE NAME 47 DISCOVERY MODE 47 SUPPORTED PROFILES 47 AUTO PAIR HANDSFREE 48

CALCULATOR 75 CALENDAR 76

SETTING THE SCHEDULE 76 VIEWING EVENT LIST 77 ERASING SAVED EVENT 77 ERASING ALL PASSED EVENTS 77

CALLER ID 25 CALL SETTINGS 65

ANSWER OPTIONS 65 AUTO RETRY 65 TTY MODE 65 ONE TOUCH DIAL 66 VOICE PRIVACY 66 DTMF TONES 66 ASSISTED DIALING 66

CALL WAITING 24 CALLING A NUMBER FROM CONTACTS 24 CHARGING YOUR BATTERY 13 CONTACTS 36

NEW CONTACT 36 CONTACT LIST 36 BACKUP ASSISTANT 36 GROUPS 36

TO ADD NEW GROUP 36 TO ASSIGN PHONE NUMBER TO GROUP 37 TO CHANGE GROUP NAME 37 ERASE GROUP 37

TO SEND A TXT MESSAGE TO A GROUP 37 TO SEND A PICTURE MESSAGE TO A GROUP 37 TO SEND A VOICE MESSAGE TO A GROUP 38

SPEED DIALS 38

TO ERASE A SAVED SPEED DIAL 38

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 39

TO ASSIGN EMERGENCY CONTACTS 39 TO REASSIGN EMERGENCY CONTACTS 39 TO ERASE ASSIGNED EMERGENCY CONTACTS 39 TO CALL AN ASSIGNED EMERGENCY CONTACT 40 TO ADD PERSONAL INFO 40 TO EDIT SAVED PERSONAL INFO 40 TO ERASE SAVED PERSONAL INFO 40

MY NAME CARD 41

EDIT MY NAME CARD 41 SEND MY NAME CARD WITH TXT, PICTURE MESSAGE 41 SEND MY NAME CARD WITH VOICE MESSAGE 41 SEND MY NAME CARD TO ANOTHER BLUETOOTH DEVICE 41

Safety and Warranty − Chapter 7

119

INDEX

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 118-119090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 118-119 2009.6.11 2:58:30 PM2009.6.11 2:58:30 PM

DISPLAY INDICATORS 9 DISPLAY SETTINGS 51

EASY SET UP 51 BANNER 52

PERSONAL BANNER 52

ERI BANNER 52 BACKLIGHT 52 WALLPAPER 53

MAIN SCREEN 53

FRONT SCREEN 53

GLOBAL TRAVELER 53 DISPLAY THEMES 54 MAIN MENU SETTINGS 54

TO SET LIST MENU LAYOUT 54

REPLACE LIST MENU ITEMS 54

POSITION LIST MENU ITEMS 55

RESET LIST MENU SETTINGS 55 DIAL FONTS 55 MENU FONT SIZE 56 TIME & DATE 56 CLOCK FORMAT 56

ENDING A CALL 22 ENTERING LETTERS, NUMBERS & SYMBOLS 32

MULTITAP MODE 33 PREDICTIVE MODE 33 NUMERIC MODE 34

SYMBOL MODE 34

HANDSET DESCRIPTIONS 7

INSIDE THE PACKAGE 6 INSTALLING A SIM CARD 14 INSTALLING THE BATTERY 12

MAKING A CALL 22 MAKING AN EMERGENCY CALL 26

MAKING AN EMERGENCY CALL IN LOCK MODE 26 MAKING AN EMERGENCY CALL IN ANY NETWORK MODE 26

MAKING CALLS OUTSIDE OF THE U.S. 23

MAKING A GSM INTERNATIONAL CALL TO CDMA FROM ANOTHER COUNTRY 23 MAKING A GSM INTERNATIONAL CALL FROM ANOTHER COUNTRY GSM ONLY 23

MEDIA CENTER 83

TUNES & TONES 84

GET NEW RINGTONES 84 MY RINGTONES 84 MY SOUNDS 85

PICTURES 86

GET NEW PICTURES 86 MY PICTURES 86 TAKE PICTURE 87 ONLINE ALBUM 88

GAMES 88

DOWNLOADING NEW GAMES 88 PLAYING DOWNLOADED GAMES 88

MOBILE WEB 88

BROWSER MENU 89

BROWSE & DOWNLOAD 90

DOWNLOADING NEW APPLICATIONS 90

EXTRAS 91

DOWNLOADING NEW APPLICATIONS 91

MEDIA CENTER INFO 91

MEMORY 67

PHONE MEMORY USAGE 67 DELETING FILES 67

MENU SUMMARY 19 MESSAGING MENU 93

WHEN A NEW MESSAGE ARRIVES 94 NEW MESSAGE 94

TXT MESSAGE 94 PICTURE MESSAGE 95

VOICE MESSAGE 96 INBOX 97 SENT 97

120

Chapter 7 − Safety and Warranty

INDEX

MESSAGES 98 DRAFTS 98 VOICEMAIL 98

WHEN A NEW VOICEMAIL ARRIVES 98 TO ACCESS YOUR VOICE

MAILBOX 99 MOBILE IM 99 EMAIL 99 CHAT 99 ERASE MESSAGES 100 SETTINGS 100

MESSAGES VIEW 100

ENTRY MODE 100

AUTO SAVE SENT 100

AUTO ERASE INBOX 101

MESSAGING FONT SIZE 101

TXT AUTO VIEW 101

MULTIMEDIA AUTO RECEIVE 101

QUICK TEXT 101

VOICEMAIL# 102

CALLBACK # 102

SIGNATURE 102

MISSED CALL NOTIFICATION 22

DISPLAY THE MISSED CALL FROM THE NOTIFICATION 22 DISPLAY A MISSED CALL FROM IDLE MODE 22

MY VERIZON 82

NOTEPAD 81

VIEW SAVED MEMO 81 ERASE SAVED MEMO 81 ERASE ALL SAVED MEMOS 81

ONE, TWO, THREE TOUCH DIALING 34

PHONE INFO 68

MY NUMBER 68 SW/HW VERSION 68 ICON GLOSSARY 68 SOFTWARE UPDATE 68

STATUS 68 CHECK NEW 69

PHONE SETTINGS 57

AIRPLANE MODE 57 SET SHORTCUTS 57

RESETTING MY SHORTCUTS 57 SET DIRECTIONAL KEYS 58 RESETTING THE DIRECTIONAL KEY SETTINGS 58

VOICE COMMANDS SETTINGS 58

CONFIRMATION 58 SENSITIVITY 59 ADAPTATION 59 PROMPTS 59 ABOUT 60

LANGUAGE 60 LOCATION 60 CURRENT COUNTRY 61 PHONE SECURITY 61

EDIT CODES 61 RESTRICTIONS 61 PHONE LOCK SETTING 62 LOCK PHONE NOW 62 RESTORE PHONE 62

SIM SECURITY 63

PIN CODE 63

SIM LOCK 63 NETWORK MODE 64 SYSTEM SELECT 64

CDMA SETTINGS 64

GSM SETTINGS 64

RECENT CALLS 42

RECENT CALLS 42 MISSED 42 RECEIVED 43 DIALED 43 BLOCKED 44 ALL 44 VIEW TIMERS 45

REMOVING A SIM CARD 15 REMOVING THE BATTERY 12

Safety and Warranty − Chapter 7

121

INDEX

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 120-121090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 120-121 2009.6.11 2:58:31 PM2009.6.11 2:58:31 PM

INDEX

Safety and Warranty − Chapter 7

123

SENSITIVITY 73 ADAPTATION 74 PROMPTS 74 ABOUT 75

VZ NAVIGATOR 91

USING THE VZ NAVIGATOR 91

WAIT/PAUSE 22 WARRANTY 117 WORLD CLOCK 80

SETTING THE CLOCK 80 SETTING DST DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME 80

SAFETY 104

SAFETY INFORMATION FOR WIRELESS HANDHELD PHONES 104 SAFETY INFORMATION FOR FCC RF EXPOSURE 107 SAR INFORMATION 107 HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY HAC FOR WIRELESS TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEVICES 108 FDA CONSUMER UPDATE 109 AVOID POTENTIAL HEARING LOSS 114 FCC COMPLIANCE INFORMATION 115 CTIA BATERY CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 116

SET UP WIZARD 69 SIM INFO 69 SOUNDS SETTINGS 48

EASY SET UP 48 CALL SOUNDS 48

CALL RINGTONE 48 CALL VIBRATE 49 CALL ALERT 49

ALERT SOUNDS 49

EMERGENCY TONE 49 KEYPAD SOUNDS 50 KEYPAD VOLUME 50 DIGIT DIAL READOUT 50 SERVICE ALERTS 50

DEVICE CONNECT 50 POWER ON/OFF 51 OPEN/CLOSE SOUNDS 51

SPEAKERPHONE 25 STOP WATCH 79

USING THE STOP WATCH 79 MEASURING MORE THEN ONE EVENT 79

STORING A PHONE NUMBER 28

ADDING A NEW CONTACT 28 OPTIONS TO CUSTOMIZE YOUR CONTACTS 28

ADDING OR CHANGING GROUPS 28 CHANGING THE CALL RINGTONE 29 ADDING OR CHANGING THE PICTURE ID 29 ADDING OR CHANGING AN EMAIL ADDRESS 29 ADDING A SPEED DIAL ENTRY 29 ADDING OR CHANGING A IM SCREEN NAME 30

EDITING CONTACTS ENTRIES 30

ADDING A PHONE NUMBER FROM IDLE MODE 30 ADDING A PHONE NUMBER FROM THE CONTACT LIST SCREEN 30

DEFAULT NUMBERS 31

CHANGING THE DEFAULT

NUMBER 31 EDITING STORED PHONE NUMBERS 31

DELETING 31

DELETING A PHONE NUMBER FROM A CONTACT 31 DELETING A CONTACT ENTRY 32 DELETING A SPEED DIAL 32

3WAY CALLING 24 TIP CALCULATOR 76 TURNING THE PHONE ON/OFF 18 TURNING VIBRATE MODE ON OR OFF 25

UNIT CONVERTER 80

VOICE COMMANDS 70

CALL <NAME OR #> 70 SEND <MSG TYPE> 71 GO TO <SHORTCUT> 71 CHECK <ITEM> 72 CONTACTS <NAME> 72 REDIAL 72 MY VERIZON 73 HELP 73

VOICE COMMANDS SETTINGS 73

CONFIRMATION 73

122

Chapter 7 − Safety and Warranty

INDEX

090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 122-123090610_WP8990_Zephyer.indd 122-123 2009.6.11 2:58:32 PM2009.6.11 2:58:32 PM

Guía del Usuario

OM8990VW

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 1090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 1 2009.6.12 10:11:40 AM2009.6.12 10:11:40 AM

CAPÍTULO 1. ANTES DE UTILIZAR SU MOVIL

ANTES DE UTILIZAR ....................................................................... 6

CONTENIDO DEL EMBALAJE ......................................................... 6

DESCRIPCION DEL MOVIL ............................................................7

INDICADORES DE LA PANTALLA ................................................... 9

INSTALACION DE LA BATERIA .................................................... 12

REMOCION DE LA BATERIA ........................................................ 12

CARGA DE LA BATERIA ..............................................................13

INFORMACIONES SOBRE LA MANIPULACION DE LA BATERIA ...... 14

INSTALACION DE UNA TARJETA SIM ........................................... 14

REMOCION DE UNA TARJETA SIM ............................................... 15

CAPÍTULO 2. OPERACION BASICA

OPERACIÓN BÁSICA .....................................................................18

ACTIVACION/DESACTIVACION DEL MOVIL .................................. 18

ACCESO AL MENU ...................................................................... 18

RESUMEN DEL MENU ................................................................ 19

REALIZAR LLAMADAS ................................................................ 23

CONTESTAR LLAMADAS ............................................................. 23

TERMINAR LLAMADAS .............................................................. 23

NOTIFICACION DE LLAMADAS NO CONTESTADAS ........................ 23

FUNCION WAIT/PAUSE ESPERA/PAUSA....................................24

REALIZACION DE LLAMADAS FUERA DE ESTADOS UNIDOS .......... 24

LLAMADA EN 3 VIAS .................................................................. 25

FUNCION CALL WAITING LLAMADA EN ESPERA ....................... 26

LLAMADA DE UN NUMERO DE LA LISTA DE CONTACTOS .............. 26

AJUSTE DEL VOLUMEN ..............................................................26

FUNCION CALLER ID IDENTIFICACION DEL INTERLOCUTOR ......27

MODO VIBRATE ON/OFF

ACTIVACION/DESACTIVACION DE LA VIBRACION ...................... 27

MODO SPEAKERPHONE ALTAVOZ ............................................ 27

OPCIONES DISPONIBLES DURANTE UNA LLAMADA ....................27

REALIZACION DE UNA LLAMADA DE EMERGENCIA .....................28

CAPÍTULO 3. FUNCION MEMORIA

FUNCIÓN MEMORIA .....................................................................30

ALMACENAMIENTO DE UN NUMERO DE TELEFONO.....................30

INSERCION DE LETRAS, NUMEROS Y SIMBOLOS ......................... 35

MARCACION CON UNO, DOS O TRES TOQUES .............................. 37

CAPÍTULO 4. FUNCIONES DEL MENU

CONTACTOS .................................................................................. 40

Índice

NEW CONTACT NUEVO CONTACTO ........................................... 40

CONTACT LIST LISTA DE CONTACTOS ........................................ 40

BACKUP ASSISTANT ASISTENTE DE BACKUP ............................ 40

GROUPS GRUPOS .................................................................... 40

SPEED DIALS MARCACIONES RAPIDAS .................................... 43

EN CASO DE EMERGENCIA ......................................................... 44

MY NAME CARD MI TARJETA DE VISITAS .................................. 46

LLAMADAS RECIENTES ................................................................. 48

RECENT CALLS LLAMADAS RECIENTES..................................... 48

MISSED CALLS LLAMADAS NO CONTESTADAS .......................... 48

RECEIVED CALLS LLAMADAS RECIBIDAS .................................. 49

DIALED CALLS LLAMADAS REALIZADAS .................................. 49

BLOCKED BLOQUEADAS ..........................................................50

ALL TODA S ............................................................................. 51

VISUALIZACION DE TIMERS .......................................................51

AJUSTES .......................................................................................52

BLUETOOTH .............................................................................. 52

AJUSTES DE SONIDO ................................................................. 55

AJUSTES DE LA PANTALLA ......................................................... 60

AJUSTES DEL MOVIL .................................................................67

AJUSTES DE LLAMADAS............................................................. 78

MEMORY MEMORIA ...............................................................81

PHONE INFO INFORMACIONES SOBRE EL MOVIL ..................... 82

SIM INFO INFORMACIONES SOBRE LA TARJETA SIM................. 83

SET UP WIZARD TUTORIAL DE CONFIGURACION ...................... 83

HERRAMIENTAS DE VOZ ............................................................... 84

MANDOS DE VOZ .......................................................................84

HERRAMIENTAS ........................................................................... 92

CALCULATOR CALCULADORA ...................................................92

TIP CALCULATOR CALCULADORA DE PROPINA .........................93

CALENDAR CALENDARIO ......................................................... 93

ALARM CLOCK RELOJ DE ALARMA ...........................................95

STOP WATCH CRONOMETRO .................................................... 97

WORLD CLOCK RELOJ MUNDIAL .............................................. 98

UNIT CONVERTER CONVERTIDOR DE UNIDADES ....................... 98

NOTEPAD B LOC DE NOTAS .......................................................99

MI VERIZON ................................................................................100

MY VERIZON MI VERIZON .......................................................100

CAPÍTULO 5. MEDIA CENTER CENTRO DE MEDIAS

CENTRO DE MEDIAS ....................................................................102

TUNES & TONES MUSICAS Y TONOS ........................................102

PICTURES IMAGENES .............................................................105

GAMES JUEGOS .....................................................................107

Índice

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 2-3090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 2-3 2009.6.12 10:11:42 AM2009.6.12 10:11:42 AM

ANTES DE UTILIZAR SU MOVIL

CAPITULO 1

ANTES DE UTILIZAR SU MOVIL

Este capítulo provee informaciones importantes sobre la utilización del móvil.

Contenido del embalaje

Descripción del móvil

Indicadores de la pantalla

Instalación de la batería

Remoción de la batería

Carga de la batería

Informaciones sobre la manipulación de la batería

Instalación de una tarjeta SIM

Remocion de una tarjeta SIM

MOBILE WEB INTERNET MOVIL ..............................................108

BROWSE & DOWNLOAD NAVEGADOR Y DOWNLOAD................110

EXTRAS ....................................................................................110

MEDIA CENTER INFO

INFORMACIONES SOBRE EL CENTRO DE MEDIAS.....................110

VZ NAVIGATOR NAVEGADOR VZ ..............................................111

CAPÍTULO 6. MENU MENSAJES

MENSAJES...................................................................................114

CUANDO SE RECIBE UN NUEVO MENSAJE ..................................114

NEW MESSAGE NUEVO MENSAJE ...........................................114

INBOX BANDEJA DE ENTRADA................................................117

SENT MESSAGES MENSAJES ENVIADOS .................................118

MESSAGES MENSAJES ...........................................................119

DRAFTS BORRADORES ...........................................................119

VOICEMAIL CORREO DE VOZ ...................................................120

MOBILE IM IM MOVIL ............................................................120

EMAIL ......................................................................................121

CHAT ........................................................................................121

ERASE MESSAGES BORRAR MENSAJES ...................................121

SETTINGS AJUSTES ................................................................122

CAPÍTULO 7. SEGURIDAD Y GARANTIA

SEGURIDAD .................................................................................126

INFORMACIONES DE SEGURIDAD PARA TELEFONOS

PORTATILES INALAMBRICOS ....................................................126

INFORMACIONES DE SEGURIDAD PARA LA EXPOSICION A

LA RADIOFRECUENCIA SEGUN LA FCC .......................................129

INFORMACIONES SAR ...............................................................129

COMPATIBILIDAD CON APARATOS DE AUDICION HAC PARA

DISPOSITIVOS DE TELECOMUNICACIONES INALAMBRICOS ........131

ACTUALIZACION DEL CONSUMIDOR SEGUN LA FDA ...................132

PARA EVITAR PERDIDA POTENCIAL DE LA AUDICION. ................137

INFORMACIONES DE CONFORMIDAD CON LA FCC ......................138

REQUISITOS DE LA CERTIFICACION DE BATERIAS CTIA ...............139

GARANTÍA ...................................................................................140

GARANTIA LIMITADA DE 12 MESES ...........................................140

INDEX ..........................................................................................142

Índice

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 4-5090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 4-5 2009.6.12 10:11:43 AM2009.6.12 10:11:43 AM

DESCRIPCION DEL MOVIL

Capítulo 1 − Antes de Utilizar

Antes de Utilizar

Antes de Utilizar − Capítulo 1

Antes de Utilizar

1. Auricular: El auricular permite oír al otro interlocutor.

2. Pantalla Principal: Exhibe todas las informaciones

necesarias para operar su móvil.

3. [

] Tecla de Dirección: Permite el desplazamiento

a través de las opciones del menú del móvil y ofrece un acceso rápido para las funciones del móvil a partir del Modo Idle (Inactivo).

4. [

] Tecla de Función Izquierda: Presione para

acceder el menú Message (Mensajes) o acceder la función indicada arriba de la tecla.

5. [

] Tecla Speakerphone (Altavoz): Con el móvil

abierto, presione esta tecla para activar o desactivar la función Altavoz.

6. [

] Tecla SEND (ENVIAR): Presione para realizar

o recibir una llamada. Desde el modo inactivo, presione para acceder la lista ALL CALLS TODAS LAS

LLAMADAS.

7. [

] Tecla Voicemail (Correo de Voz): En el Modo

Idle (Inactivo), Presione y mantenga presionada para conectar automáticamente a su servidor de correo de voz.

8. [

] Tecla Shift (Alternancia): Presiónela para

insertar un asterisco (*) para funciones de llamada. En el

modo de inserción de texto, presiónela para cambiar el tipo de inserción de caracteres. Presione y manténgala presionada para exhibir el signo “más” (+) para llamadas internacionales.

9. Micrófono: Permite que el otro interlocutor oiga a

quien llama.

10. [

] Tecla del Modo Vibrate (Vibración):

Presione y mantenga presionada para activar/desactivar el modo de vibración en modo Idle (Inac tivo). Presiónela para insertar el caractere (#) para funciones de llamada. En el modo de inserción de texto, presiónela para aceptar la palabra en el modo T9 Word para agregar un espacio.

11. [

] Tecla CLR (Borrar): Presione para borrar

un caractere de la pantalla. Presione y mantenga presionada para borrar todos los caracteres. Dentro de un menú, presione para volver al menú anterior.

12. [

] Tecla END/PWR: Presione y mantenga

presionada para encender/apagar el móvil o presione para terminar una llamada o la sesión del navegador. Dentro de un menú, presione para volver al modo Idle (Inactivo).

13 12

5 6

CONTENIDO DEL EMBALAJE

Este embalaje deberá incluir los ítems indicados a continuación. Si cualquier ítem estuviere ausente o fuere diferente, contáctese inmediatamente con la tienda donde usted adquirió su móvil.

Cargador de

Pared

QRG (Guía de Referencia

Rápida)

PSW (Informaciones de

Seguridad del Producto y

sobre Garantía)

PRODUCT SAFETY AND WARRANTY INFORMATION

Móvil

Tapa del

Compartimiento

de la Batería

Batería Estándar

3 adaptadores con conec-

tor de alimentación para

uso en el exterior

Tarjeta SIM

(Preinstalado)

Kit de Soporte Global

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 6-7090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 6-7 2009.6.12 10:11:44 AM2009.6.12 10:11:44 AM

Capítulo 1 − Antes de Utilizar

Antes de Utilizar

Antes de Utilizar − Capítulo 1

Antes de Utilizar

INDICADORES DE LA PANTALLA

Iconos del Indicador Principal

Fuerza de la Señal 1X: Servicio 1X disponible.

Fuerza de la Señal D: Servicio digital disponible.

Fuerza de la Señal GSM: Servicio GSM disponible.

Fuerza de la Señal GPRS: Servicio GPRS disponible.

Modo Airplane (Avión): Las informaciones sobre transmisión y

recepción son restringidas.

Roaming: El móvil está fuera del área de servicio local.

SSL (Secured Socket Layer [Capa de Terminal Protegida]): Indica

que la comunicación segura entre el cliente y servidor fue establecida durante la comunicación de datos utilizando recursos de criptografía.

Voice Privacy (Privacidad de Voz): Indica que el modo Voice Privacy está activado.

Data Call (Llamada de datos): La Sesión de Datos está en progreso.

Dormant (Durmiente): El móvil está en estado durmiente durante

una llamada de datos. El móvil será revertido al modo Dormant cuando no ocurra actividad en una página durante algún tiempo – la conexión se activará y se podrán realizar y recibir las llamadas.

Iconos del Indicador Principal

No Service (Sin Servicio): El móvil no puede recibir la señal del sistema.

TTY: El modo TTY está activado.

Voice Call (Llamada de Voz): Una llamada está en progreso.

* La ausencia de iconos indica que el teléfono está en el modo Idle (Inactivo).

Icono GPS E911: El Servicio de Ubicación de su móvil es E911.

Icono de Ubicación GPS Activado: El Ser vicio de Ubicación de su

móvil está ajustado en Location On (Modo de Ubicación Activado).

Bluetooth: Indica el modo Bluetooth.

Bluetooth Active (Bluetooth Activado): Indica que el modo

Bluetooth está operando.

Bluetooth Connected (Bluetooth conectado): Indica que un dispositivo Bluetooth está conectado.

Battery Level (Nivel de la Batería): Nivel de carga de la batería – cuanto más bloques, mayor es la carga.

AVR Active (AVR Activado): El modo AVR está activado.

13. [ ] Tecla New TXT Message (Nuevo Mensaje de Texto): Con el móvil abierto, presione para acceder el menú NEW TXT

MESSAGE (Nuevo Mensaje de Texto).

14. [

] Tecla de Función Derecha:

Presione para acceder Contacts

(Contactos) en el modo Idle (Inactivo)

o acceder la función indicada arriba de la tecla.

15. [

] Tecla OK: Presione para acceder

MENU desde el modo Idle (Inactivo). Ella

también permite que usted acepte las elecciones cuando navegue en un menú.

16. Parlante Externo: Música, Ringtones (Campanillas) y Tonos son reproducidos a través del parlante.

17. Pantalla del Visor Frontal: Exhibe llamadas recibidas, mensajes, signos, carga da batería, hora y fecha.

18. Encaje del Tirante de Pulso: Encaje para accesorios (tirantes y cordones opcionales – adquiridos en separado).

19. Camera (Cámara): Lente de la cámara integrada.

20. Ranura para Tarjeta SIM: Permite que

usted insiera una tarjeta SIM. La Tarjeta SIM está preinstalada en el dispositivo (ubicado abajo de la batería).

21. Conector de Audífonos de 2,5 mm:

Permite que usted conecte un audífono opcional para conversaciones convenientes con manos libres (modo altavoz).

22. [

/ ] Teclas Volume (Volumen):

Permite el ajuste del volumen principal en modo Idle (Inactivo) o el ajuste del volumen de la voz durante una llamada.

23. [

] Tecla Camera (Cámara): Presione

y mantenga presionada para acceder la cámara integrada.

24. [

] Tecla Voice Commands (Mandos

de Voz): Presione para un rápido acceso a los Mandos de Voz.

25. Conector Charging/Data (Carga/ Datos): Conecte el Cargador de Pared o el Cable USB a este conector. (Cable USB vendido en separado).

1918

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 8-9090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 8-9 2009.6.12 10:11:47 AM2009.6.12 10:11:47 AM

Iconos del Indicador Principal

AVR Listening (Escucha AVR): Indica que el sistema AVR está transmitiendo instrucciones audibles.

SIM Card (Tarjeta SIM): Indica que una Tarjeta de memoria SIM está en uso.

All Sounds Off (Todos los sonidos desactivados): Todos los sonidos están desactivados.

Alarm Only (Solamente Alarma): El móvil lo notificará solamente con un alerta de alarma.

Vibrate Only (Solamente Vibración): El teléfono vibrará cuando se reciba una llamada.

Speakerphone (Altavoz): El teléfono está en el modo Speakerphone (Altavoz).

Missed Calls (Llamadas no Contestadas): Indica que hay llamadas no contestadas.

Message (Mensaje): Indica que hay un nuevo mensaje.

Calendar Appointment (Compromiso en el Calendario): Una

Alarma de evento está activada.

Voicemail (Correo de Voz): Indica que hay mensajes de correo de voz.

Iconos del Indicador Principal

Alarm On (Alarma Activada): Se exhibirá cuando una alarma esté activada.

DST: El modo DST (Horario de Verano) está activado.

Iconos de Llamadas Recientes

Llamada Realizada

Llamada no Contestada

Llamada Recibida

Iconos de Nuevo Contacto

Mobile1 (Móvil 1)

Ringtone (Tono de Campanilla)

Mobile2 (Móvil 2) FAX

Home (Residencia)

Speed Dial (Marcación Rápida)

Work (Trabajo)

Voice Dial (Marcación por Voz)

Capítulo 1 − Antes de Utilizar

Antes de Utilizar

Iconos de Nuevo Contacto

Email 1 Address (Dirección)

Email 2 WL Messenger

Group (Grupo) AIM

Picture (Imagen) Yahoo!

Iconos de Mensajes

New/Unread Message (Mensaje Nuevo/No Leído)

Priority (Prioridad)

Opened/Read Message (Mensaje Abierto/ Leído)

Unopened Message Notification (Notificación de Mensaje No Abierto)

Unread EMS (EMS No Leído)

Opened Download Picture Message (Mensaje con Imagen Descargada y Abierta)

Read EMS (EMS Leído)

Corrupt Message (Mensaje Corrompido)

Iconos de Mensajes

Message Delivered (Mensaje Entregado)

Pending Message Send (Mensaje Enviado, Pendiente)

Incomplete Delivery (Entrega Incompleta)

Unread MMS (MMS No Leído)

Sent Message, Delivery Failed (Mensaje Enviado, Falla en la Entrega)

Read MMS (MMS Leído)

Message Locked (Mensaje Bloqueado)

Sent Message (Mensaje Enviado)

Text Message Draft (Borrador de Mensaje de Texto)

Message Delivered (Mensaje Entregado)

Picture Message Draft (Borrador de Mensaje con Imagen)

Unread WAP Push (WAP Push No Leído)

Read WAP Push (WAP Push Leído)

Multiple Message Pending (Múltiples Mensajes Pendientes)

Antes de Utilizar − Capítulo 1

Antes de Utilizar

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 10-11090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 10-11 2009.6.12 10:11:50 AM2009.6.12 10:11:50 AM

Iconos de Mensajes

Multiple Message Delivered (Múltiples Mensajes Entregados)

Multiple SMS/MMS Ack (Múltiples SMS/ Confirmación de MMS)

Multiple Message Failed (Múltiples Mensajes con Falla)

IM Screen (Pantalla IM)

Multiple Message Incomplete (Múltiples Mensajes Incompletos)

INSTALACION DE LA BATERIA

1. Presione la parte superior de la tapa del compartimiento de la batería

y desplácela hacia afuera para sacarla.

2. Desplace la batería en la ranura (1) alineando los contactos ubicados

en la parte superior del móvil y presione (2) hasta oír el clic.

3. Alinee las lenguetas de la tapa con las ranuras en la parte trasera

del móvil y desplace la tapa del compar timiento de la batería sobre el móvil.

Si la batería no es instalada correctamente desde el compartimiento, el móvil no se

encenderá y/o la batería se podrá soltar durante el uso.

REMOCION DE LA BATERIA

1. Para quitar la tapa del compartimiento de la batería, presione la

parte superior de la ranura y desplácela hacia afuera del aparato.

Capítulo 1 − Antes de Utilizar

Antes de Utilizar

2. Presione la parte inferior de la batería hacia arriba mientras insiere el

dedo en la ranura (1) y remueva (2) la batería.

3. Alinee las lenguetas de la tapa con las ranuras en la parte trasera del

móvil y desplace la tapa de la batería sobre el móvil.

CARGA DE LA BATERIA

1. Para cargar el móvil, abra la tapa del Conector

Charging/Data (Carga/Datos) y conecte el cargador de pared. Certifíquese alinear el cargador de pared según indicado en la figura. En caso contrario, ocurrirán daños al conector de carga en el móvil y la carga no se realizará.

2. Conecte el extremo externo a una toma de electricidad estándar.

3. Para quitar el cargador de pared, presione

los botones laterales del cargador (1) y tire el cargador del móvil (2).

• Cuando cargue la batería con el móvil apagado, se visualizará una pantalla de estado

de la carga. No es posible operar el móvil hasta que se encienda.

•

La batería no estará completamente cargada en el momento de la compra. Cargue

completamente la batería antes del primer uso.

•

Es más eficiente cargar la batería con el móvil apagado.

•

El tiempo de operación de la batería se reducirá gradualmente con el pasar del

tiempo.

•

Si la batería no opera normalmente, a lo mejor sea necesario reemplazarla.

Cuando usted cargue la batería en otras regiones podrá utilizar CONECTORES DE

ALIMENTACION INTERNACIONALES de Europa, Australia o Reino Unido / Hong Kong.

Antes de Utilizar − Capítulo 1

Antes de Utilizar

CORRECTO INCORRECTO

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 12-13090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 12-13 2009.6.12 10:11:55 AM2009.6.12 10:11:55 AM

INFORMACIONES SOBRE LA MANIPULACION DE LA BATERIA

QUE SE PUEDE HACER

•

Utilizar solamente la batería y el cargador aprobados para uso con este teléfono.

•

Utilizar solamente la batería para su finalidad original.

•

Tratar de mantener las baterías a temperatura entre 5°C y 35°C. Si la batería es

almacenada en ambientes con temperaturas arriba o abajo del rango recomendado, espere que se caliente o enfríe antes del uso.

•

Guardar la batería descargada en un lugar frío, oscuro y seco.

•

Adquirir una nueva batería cuando su tiempo de operación sea gradualmente

reducido aún después de una carga completa.

•

Desechar adecuadamente la batería según las leyes locales.

QUE NO SE PUEDE HACER

•

No intente desarmar la batería. Ella es un dispositivo sellado sin partes que se

pueden reparar por el usuario.

•

No haga cortocircuito accidentalmente a la batería transportándola en el bolsillo

con otros objetos metálicos como por ejemplo, monedas, clips y bolígrafos. Esto puede dañar permanentemente la batería.

•

No deje la batería bajo temperaturas extremamente cálidas o frías. En caso con-

trario, la capacidad y la vida útil de la batería se podrán reducir significativamente.

•

No deseche la batería tirándola al fuego.

INSTALACION DE UNA TARJETA SIM

Su móvil es proveído con una tarjeta SIM instalada que, junto con una Función Global (se pueden aplicar tarifas adicionales al utilizar esa función), le permite realizar llamadas y acceder correos electrónicos en redes GSM durante viajes al exterior. Si su tarjeta SIM se pierde o daña, por favor siga estas instrucciones para la instalación de su nueva tarjeta SIM.

• Si su tarjeta SIM se pierde o daña dentro de Estados Unidos, por favor llame *611

desde su móvil ó 1.800.922.0204 para comunicarse con un Representante de Servicio al Cliente. En localidades fuera de Estados Unidos, llame +1-908-559-4899.

•

No doble ni raye su tarjeta SIM. Evite exponer su tarjeta SIM a la electricidad estática,

agua o suciedad.

•

La Tarjeta SIM está preinstalada en su móvil.

1. Quite la tapa de la batería de la parte trasera del móvil.

2. Presione la parte inferior del compar timiento de la batería hacia

arriba mientras insiere su dedo dentro de la ranura (1) y remueva la batería.

Capítulo 1 − Antes de Utilizar

Antes de Utilizar

3. Certifíquese que los contactos dorados de la tarjeta SIM estén vol-

cados hacia abajo; entonces desplace la tarjeta SIM completamente dentro del terminal.

4. Desplace la batería (1) dentro de la ranura alineando los contactos

ubicados en la parte superior del móvil y presione (2) hasta oír que se encajó.

5. Alinee las lenguetas de la tapa con las ranuras en la parte trasera del

dispositivo y desplace la tapa de la batería en el móvil.

REMOCION DE UNA TARJETA SIM

1. Quite la tapa de la batería presionando la parte superior de la tapa de

la batería y desplácela hacia afuera del móvil.

2. Presione la parte inferior de la batería hacia arriba mientras insiere el

dedo dentro de la ranura (1) y remueva la batería.

3. Quite la tarjeta SIM de la ranura de la tarjeta SIM.

Antes de Utilizar − Capítulo 1

Antes de Utilizar

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 14-15090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 14-15 2009.6.12 10:11:57 AM2009.6.12 10:11:57 AM

OPERACION BASICA

CAPITULO 2

OPERACION BASICA

Este capítulo describe y explica las funciones básicas de su móvil incluyendo:

4. Desplace la batería (1) dentro de la ranura alineando los contactos

ubicados en la parte superior del móvil y presione (2) hasta oír que se encajó.

5. Alinee las lenguetas de la tapa con las ranuras en la parte trasera del

móvil y desplace la tapa de la batería en el móvil.

Por favor, no instale su Tarjeta SIM en otro móvil ya que esto puede causar problemas

con su servicio Global Service.

Capítulo 1 − Antes de Utilizar

Antes de Utilizar

Activación/Desactivación del móvil

Acceso al menú

Resumen del menú

Realizar llamadas

Contestar llamadas

Términar llamadas

Notificación de llamadas no contestadas

Funcion Wait/Pause (Espera/Pausa)

Realización de llamadas fuera de estados unidos

Llamada en 3 vías

Funcion call waiting (Llamada en espera)

Llamada de un número de la lista de contactos

Ajuste del volumen

Funcion caller ID (Identificación del interlocutor)

Modo vibrate on/off (Activación/Desactivación de la

vibración )

Modo speakerphone (Altavoz ) Opciones disponibles durante una llamada Realización de una llamada de emergencia

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 16-17090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 16-17 2009.6.12 10:11:58 AM2009.6.12 10:11:58 AM

ACTIVACION/DESACTIVACION DEL MOVIL

ACTIVACION DEL MOVIL

1. Presione y mantenga presionada la tecla END/PWR (FIN/

ALIMENTACION) hasta que la pantalla se active.

• Si se exhibe en la pantalla el mensaje Enter Lock Code (Insiera el Código

de Bloqueo), insiera su código de bloqueo de 4 dígitos para desbloquear

su móvil.

•

El código de bloqueo estándar son los últimos 4 dígitos del número de

su móvil.

DESACTIVACION DEL MOVIL

1. Presione y mantenga presionada la tecla END/PWR (FIN/

ALIMENTACION) hasta que la pantalla se desactive.

• Reemplace inmediatamente o recargue la batería cuando se exhiba en la

pantalla el mensaje BATTERY LOW (BATERIA CON POCA CARGA). La memoria se puede perjudicar si el móvil es apagado en virtud de una descarga completa de la batería.

•

Apague el móvil antes de remover o reemplazar la batería. Si el móvil está

encendido, los datos no grabados se pueden perder.

ACCESO AL MENU

Usted puede personalizar su móvil a través de un menú. Cada función se puede acceder recurriendo ítems con la Tecla de Dirección

o presionando

la tecla numérica que corresponda al ítem del menú.

1. Para acceder el menú presione la tecla OK [MENU].

2. Para recurrir el menú, presione la Tecla de Dirección

hacia

arriba, hacia abajo, izquierda o derecha.

3. Para volver a la página anterior, presione la tecla CLR

. Para salir

del menú actual, presione la tecla END/PWR (FIN/ALIMENTACION)

4. Para acceder el menú MESSAGING MENSAJES, presione la Tecla

de Función Izquierda

[Message (Mensaje)].

5. Para acceder a CONTACT LIST LISTA DE CONTACTOS, presione la

Tecla de Función Derecha

[Contacts (Contactos)].

Todas las orientaciones de este manual están basadas en los ítems List

(Lista) y Communicator Menu Layout (Diseño del Menú del Comunicador)

y The World Display Theme (El Tema Mundial de Pantalla). Si usted cambia los ajustes, las orientaciones pueden variar.

Capítulo 2 − Operación Básica

Operación Básica

RESUMEN DEL MENU

Menú Principal 2º. NIVEL 3ER NIVEL

1. Media Center (Centro de Medias)

1. Tunes & Tones (Campanillas y Tonos)

1. Get New Ringtones (Obtener Nuevas Campanillas de Toque)

2. My Ringtones (Mis Campanillas de Toque)

3. My Sounds (Mis Sonidos)

2. Pictures (Imágenes) 1. Get New Pictures (Obtener Nuevas Imágenes)

2. My Pictures (Mis Imágenes)

3. Take Picture (Capturar Imagen)

4. Online Album (Álbum En línea)

3. Games (Juegos) 1. Get New Applications (Obtener Nuevas Aplicaciones)

4. Mobile Web

5. Browse & Download

(Navegación y Download)

1. Get New Applications (Obtener Nuevas Aplicaciones) Backup Assistant (Asistente de Backup) Mobile Email (E-mail Móvil) VZ Navigator (Navegador VZ)

Menú Principal 2º. NIVEL 3ER NIVEL

1. Media Center (Centro de Medias)

6. Extras 1. Get New Applications (Obtener Nuevas Aplicaciones)

2. Messaging (Mensajes)

1. New Message (Nuevo Mensaje)

1. TXT Message (Mensaje de Texto)

2. Picture Message (Mensaje con Imagen)

3. Voice Message (Mensaje de Voz)

2. Inbox (Bandeja de Entrada)

3. Sent (Ítems Enviados)

4. Drafts (Borradores)

5. Voicemail (Correo de Voz)

6. Mobile IM

7. Email 1. Mobile Email

2. Mobile Web Mail

8. Chat

Operación Básica − Capítulo 2

Operación Básica

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 18-19090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 18-19 2009.6.12 10:12:0 AM2009.6.12 10:12:0 AM

Menú Principal 2º. NIVEL 3ER NIVEL

3. My Ringtones (Mis Campanillas de Toque)

1. Get New Ringtones (Obtener Nuevas Campanillas de Toque)

4. My Pictures (Mis Imágenes)

1. Open Picture Gallery (Abrir Galería de Imágenes)

5. Bluetooth 1. Add New Device (Agregar Nuevo Dispositivo)

6. Contacts

(Contactos)

1. New Contact (Nuevo Contacto)

2. Contact List (Lista de Contactos)

3. Backup Assistant (Asistente de Backup)

4. Groups (Grupos)

5. Speed Dials (Marcaciones Rápidas)

6. In Case of Emergency (En caso de Emergencia)

7. My Name Card (Mi Tarjeta de Visitas)

Menú Principal 2º. NIVEL 3ER NIVEL

7. Recent Calls (Llamadas Recientes)

1. Missed (No Contestadas)

2. Received (Recibidas)

3. Dialed (Marcadas)

4. Blocked (Bloqueadas) – Este menú sólo se exhibirá cuando la función Incoming Call Restriction (Restricción de Llamadas Recibidas) sea activada. Para detalles, ver la página 74.

5. All (Todas)

6. View Timers (Visualizar

Timers)

8. VZ Navigator (Navegador VZ)

1. Launch VZ Navigator (Activar Navegador VZ)

9. Settings & Tools (Ajustes y Herramientas)

1. My Verizon (Mi Verizon)

2. Tools (Herramientas) 1. Voice Commands (Mandos de Voz)

2. Calculator (Calculadora)

3. Tip Calculator (Calculadora de Propina)

4. Calendar (Calendario)

Capítulo 2 − Operación Básica

Operación Básica

Menú Principal 2º. NIVEL 3ER NIVEL

9. Settings & Tools (Ajustes y Herramientas)

2. Tools (Herramientas) 5. Alarm Clock (Reloj de Alarma)

6. Stop Watch (Cronómetro)

7. World Clock (Reloj Mundial)

8. Unit Converter (Convertidor de Unidades)

9. Notepad (Bloc de Notas)

3. Bluetooth 1. Add New Device (Agregar Nuevo Dispositivo)

4. Sounds Settings (Ajustes

de Sonidos)

1. Easy Set-up (Configuración Fácil)

2. Call Sounds (Sonidos de Llamadas)

3. Alert Sounds (Sonidos de Alerta)

4. Keypad Sounds (Sonidos del Teclado)

5. Keypad Volume (Volumen del Teclado)

6. Digit Dial Redaout (Lectura de Marcación de Dígitos)

7. Service Alerts (Alertas de Servicio)

8. Device Connect (Conexión de Dispositivo)

Menú Principal 2º. NIVEL 3ER NIVEL

9. Settings & Tools (Ajustes y Herramientas)

4. Sounds Settings (Ajustes de Sonidos)

9. Power On/Off (Activación/ Apagado de la Alimentación)

0. Open/Close Sounds (Sonidos de Apertura/Cierre)

5. Display Settings (Ajustes de la Pantalla)

1. Easy Set-up (Configuración Fácil)

2. Banner

3. Backlight (Luz de Fondo)

4. Wallpaper (Papel de Pared)

5. Pantalla Themes (Temas de la Pantalla)

6. Main Menu Settings (Configuraciones del Menú Principal)

7. Dial Fonts (Fuentes de Marcación)

8. Menu Font Size (Tamaño de la Fuente del Menú)

9. Time & Date (Hora y Data) – Este menú sólo se exhibirá cuando el modo GSM o Global sea activado. Para detalles, ver la página 77.

0. Clock Format (Formato Del Reloj)

Operación Básica − Capítulo 2

Operación Básica

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 20-21090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 20-21 2009.6.12 10:12:1 AM2009.6.12 10:12:1 AM

Menú Principal 2º. NIVEL 3ER NIVEL

9. Settings & Tools (Ajustes y Herramientas)

6. Phone Settings (Ajustes del Teléfono)

1. Airplane Mode (Modo Avión)

2. Set Shortcuts (Configurar Accesos rápidos)

3. Voice Commands Settings (Ajustes de los mandos de Voz)

4. Language (Idioma)

5. Location (Localización)

6. Current Country (País Actual)

7. Phone Security (Seguridad del Teléfono)

8. SIM Security (Seguridad SIM)

9. Network Mode (Modo de Red)

0. System Select (Elección del Sistema)

7. Call Settings (Ajustes de Llamadas)

1. Answer Options (Opciones de Contestar)

2. Auto Retry (Repetición Automática de Intentos)

3. TTY Mode (Modo TTY)

4. One Touch Dial (Marcación con Un Toque)

Menú Principal 2º. NIVEL 3ER NIVEL

9. Settings & Tools (Ajustes y Herramientas)

7. Call Settings (Ajustes de Llamadas)

5. Voice Privacy (Privacidad de Voz)

6. DTMF Tones (Tonos DTMF)

7. Assisted Dialing (Marcación Asistida)

8. Memory (Memoria) 1. Phone Memory (Memoria del Teléfono)

9. Phone Info

(Informaciones sobre el Móvil)

1. My Number (Mi Número)

2. SW/HW Version (Versión del Software/Hardware)

3. Icon Glossary (Glosario de Iconos)

4. Software Update (Actualización del Software)

0. SIM Info (Informaciones sobre SIM)

*. Set-up Wizard (Tutorial

de Configuración)

Capítulo 2 − Operación Básica

Operación Básica

REALIZAR LLAMADAS

1. Insiera el número de teléfono (incluya el código de área si fuere

necesario) y presione la Tecla SEND (ENVIAR) .

Cuando una llamada sea realizada o recibida de números almacenados

en su lista Contact (Contactos) con un nombre atribuido, este nombre se exhibirá.

CONTESTAR LLAMADAS

1. Presione la tecla SEND (ENVIAR) para contestar la llamada

recibida.

Dependiendo de los ajustes de su móvil, también podrá contestar las

llamadas abriendo el móvil o presionando cualquier tecla.

2. Para ignorar llamadas recibidas, presione la Tecla de Función de la

Derecha [Ignore (Ignorar)].

Si el modo Auto w/Handsfree (Automático con Manos Libres) es activado,

una llamada se contestará automáticamente después de un número previamente ajustado de toques del móvil. Para más detalles, ver la página 78.

TERMINAR LLAMADAS

1. Presione la tecla END/PWR (FIN/ALIMENTACION) .

NOTIFICACION DE LLAMADAS NO CONTESTADAS

Cuando una llamada recibida no es contestada, el logotipo Missed Call

(Llamada No Contestada) se exhibirá en la pantalla.

PARA EXHIBIR LA INFORMACION DE UNA LLAMADA NO CONTESTADA MISSED CALL

1. Seleccione la opción View Now (Ver Ahora) y presione la Tecla OK.

2. Para marcar el número del teléfono, presione la Tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

PARA EXHIBIR LA INFORMACION DE UNA LLAMADA NO CONTESTADA DESDE LA PANTALLA DEL MODO IDLE INACTIVO

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Recent Calls (Llamadas

Recientes) y presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Missed (No Contestadas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Operación Básica − Capítulo 2

Operación Básica

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 22-23090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 22-23 2009.6.12 10:12:2 AM2009.6.12 10:12:2 AM

3. Seleccione la llamada no contestada y enseguida presione la Tecla OK

[OPEN (ABRIR)].

4. Para marcar el número del teléfono, presione la Tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

FUNCION WAIT/PAUSE ESPERA/PAUSA

Las pausas son utilizadas para sistemas automatizados (es decir, correo de voz y tarjetas de llamada). Los números insertados son marcados automáticamente después de la pausa. Esta función es útil para marcación en sistemas que exigen un código.

Wait (W) (Esperar)

El móvil interrumpirá el marcado hasta que usted presione la Tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

para avanzar al número siguiente.

1. Insiera el número de teléfono.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

3. Seleccione Add Wait (Agregar Espera) y presione la Tecla OK.

4. Marque el(los) número(s) adicional(es).

5. Presione la Tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

para marcar.

2-Sec Pause (T) (Pausa de 2 S egundos)

El móvil esperará 2 segundos antes de enviar la próxima secuencia de dígitos automáticamente.

1. Insiera el número de teléfono.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

3. Seleccione Add 2-Sec Pause (Pausa de 2 Segundos) y presione

la Tecla OK.

4. Insiera el(los) número(s) adicional(es) (número PIN o el número de

la tarjeta de crédito).

5. Presione la Tecla SEND (ENVIAR) para marcar.

REALIZACION DE LLAMADAS FUERA DE ESTADOS UNIDOS

La Tarjeta SIM está preinstalada en su móvil.

REALIZACION DE UNA LLAMADA INTERNACIONAL GSM A CDMA DE OTRO PAIS

Estados Unidos está considerado, en este caso, el país estándar (país de referencia) en su móvil. Cuando la función Assisted Dialing (Marcación Asistida) sea ajustada en

Capítulo 2 − Operación Básica

Operación Básica

ON (estándar), y el país de referencia es Estados Unidos, usted podrá realizar una lla-

mada a Estados Unidos desde cualquier otro país utilizando un número existente en su Lista de Contactos (como si usted estuviese en Estados Unidos). En este escenario, no hay necesidad de agregar el código externo de su país cuando llame a números de contactos utilizando estos ajustes.

1. Presione y mantenga presionada la Tecla International Dial (Llamada

Internacional) para exhibir el signo “+”. Este signo “+” insertará automáticamente el código de salida al país desde el cual usted está llamando.

2. Presione

para insertar el código de Estados Unidos y enseguida

el código de área y el número.

3. Presione la Tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

REALIZACION DE UNA LLAMADA INTERNACIONAL GSM DESDE OTRO PAIS SOLAMENTE GSM

1. Presione y mantenga presionada la Tecla International Dial (Llamada

Internacional) para exhibir el signo “+”. El signo “+” insertará automáticamente el código internacional al país desde el cual usted está llamando.

2. Insiera el código del país de la persona a la cual usted está llamando.

Insiera el código de área, sin el primer cero, seguido por el número de la persona que usted está llamando.

3. Presione la Tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

Hay algunas excepciones para excluir el cero como por ejemplo, Italia,

Finlandia y España.

Ver la página 80 para detalles sobre la Marcación Asistida.

LLAMADA EN 3 VIAS

Usted puede hablar con dos personas al mismo tiempo. Durante la llamada, las tarifas de tiempo de operación normal se aplicarán a cada una de las dos llamadas.

1. Insiera el número del teléfono y enseguida presione la Tecla SEND

(ENVIAR) .

2. Cuando se establezca la conexión, insiera el segundo número de

teléfono que desea llamar y enseguida presione la tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

3. Cuando la segunda llamada esté conectada con la segunda persona,

presione la tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

nuevamente para iniciar su

Llamada en 3 Vías (3-Way Call).

Operación Básica − Capítulo 2

Operación Básica

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 24-25090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 24-25 2009.6.12 10:12:3 AM2009.6.12 10:12:3 AM

Si una de las personas participantes se desconec ta durante la llamada,

usted y el interlocutor remanente seguirán conectados. Si la llamada es iniciada y el primero interlocutor se desconecta, las tres llamadas se desconectarán.

FUNCION CALL WAITING LLAMADA EN ESPERA

Si una llamada estuviere en progreso y otra llamada es recibida, usted escuchará una señal audible y el número del teléfono del interlocutor se exhibirá en la pantalla. Con la función Call Waiting (Llamada en Espera) se puede colocar la llamada en curso en espera mientras contesta la otra llamada recibida.

1. Presione la Tecla SEND (ENVIAR) para contestar la otra llamada.

Esto colocará la primera llamada automáticamente en espera. Para volver al primer interlocutor, presione la Tecla SEND (ENVIAR) nuevamente.

LLAMADA DE UN NUMERO DE LA LISTA DE CONTACTOS

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha [Contacts (Contactos)].

2. Seleccione el contacto y enseguida presione la Tecla OK [VIEW

(VISUALIZAR)].

3. Seleccione el número de teléfono.

4. Presione la tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

para realizar la llamada.

La realización de la llamada desde la pantalla VIEW CONTACT (VISUALIZAR

CONTACTO) marcará el número estándar automáticamente. Si el contacto

tiene múltiples números grabados, seleccione el número por marcar y enseguida presione la Tecla SEND (Enviar) .

AJUSTE DEL VOLUMEN

PARA AJUSTAR EL VOLUMEN PRINCIPAL

1. Presione las Teclas Volumen / hacia arriba y hacia abajo

para seleccionar entre: All Sounds Off (Todos los Sonidos

Desactivados), Alarm Only (Solamente Alarma), Vibrate Only (Solamente Vibración), Low (Bajo), Medium Low (Bajo Mediano), Medium (Mediano), Medium High (Alto Mediano)

y High (Alto).

2. Presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)] para grabar.

3. Para verificar el volumen de las campanillas de toque, presione la

Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Play (Reproducir)].

Capítulo 2 − Operación Básica

Operación Básica

AJUSTE DEL VOLUMEN DURANTE UNA LLAMADA

1. Para subir el volumen, presione las Teclas de Volumen hacia arriba.

2. Para bajar el volumen, presione las Teclas de Volumen

hacia abajo.

FUNCION CALLER ID IDENTIFICACION DEL INTERLOCUTOR

La función Caller ID (Identificación del Interlocutor) exhibirá el nombre y el número de la persona que está llamando. Si las informaciones del interlocutor no estuvieren almacenadas en su Contacts List (Lista de

Contactos), solamente el número del teléfono se exhibirá.

MODO VIBRATE ON/OFF ACTIVACION/ DESACTIVACION DE LA VIBRACION

El Modo Vibrate (Vibración) silenciará los tonos del teclado y activar un alerta para llamadas o mensajes recibidos.

1. Para activar, presione y mantenga presionada la Tecla Vibrate Mode

(Modo de Vibración) .

2. Para desactivar, presione y mantenga presionada la Tecla Vibrate

Mode (Modo de Vibración)

nuevamente.

MODO SPEAKERPHONE ALTAVOZ

El modo Speakerphone (Altavoz) permite escuchar el audio a través de un modo altavoz, y hablar sin que sea necesario sujetar propiamente el móvil.

1. Para activar, con el teléfono abierto, presione la Tecla Speakerphone

(Altavoz)

. Para desactivar, presione la Tecla Speakerphone

(Altavoz) nuevamente.

Si usted activar el modo Speakerphone (Altavoz) cuando no estuviere en

una llamada, el modo altavoz se desactivará automáticamente después de un minuto.

OPCIONES DISPONIBLES DURANTE UNA LLAMADA

Durante una llamada telefónica, se pueden acceder las funciones a continuación, presionando la Tecla de Función Derecha [Options

(Opciones)]. Presione la Tecla OK para seleccionar cualquiera de las

opciones a continuación:

•

New message (Nuevo Mensaje)

•

Contac t List (Lista de Contactos)

•

Recent Calls (Llamadas Recientes)

•

Bluetooth

•

Main Menu (Menú Principal)

Operación Básica − Capítulo 2

Operación Básica

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 26-27090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 26-27 2009.6.12 10:12:4 AM2009.6.12 10:12:4 AM

FUNCION MEMORIA

CAPITULO 3

FUNCION MEMORIA

Este capítulo describe las funciones de memoria incluyendo:

Almacenamiento de un número de teléfono

Inserción de letras, números y símbolos

Marcación con uno, dos o tres toques

•

Notepad (Bloc de Notas)

•

Voice Privacy (Privacidad de Voz)

REALIZACION DE UNA LLAMADA DE EMERGENCIA

La función 911 ajusta automáticamente el teléfono al Modo Emergency Call (Llamada de Emergencia) cuando se marca el número de emergencia 911 programado. Ella también opera en Modo Lock (Bloqueado) y fuera del área de servicio.

REALIZACION DE UNA LLAMADA DE EMERGENCIA EN EL MODO LOCK BLOQUEADO

1. Digite cualquiera de los números 911, *911, #911 o 112 y presione la

Tecla SEND (ENVIAR) .

El móvil permanecerá en el Modo Emergency (Emergencia) durante 5

minutos. Cuando la llamada es terminada, el móvil volverá al Modo Lock (Bloqueado).

REALIZACION DE UNA LLAMADA DE EMERGENCIA EN CUALQUIER MODO DE RED

1. Digite cualquiera de los números 911, *911, #911 o 112 y presione

la Tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

. En ALL NETWORK MODE (MODO PARA

TODAS LAS REDES) - Modos CDMA, GSM y Global.

El móvil permanecerá en Modo Emergency (Emergencia) durante 5 minu-

tos. Mientras el móvil esté en Modo Emergency (Emergencia), se podrá recibir una llamada desde cualquier sistema disponible o se puede realizar llamadas aún en Modo Emergency Callback (Llamada de Retorno de Emergencia). En este caso, la realización de una llamada podrá terminar el Modo Emergency Callback (Llamada de Retorno de Emergencia).

La llamada 911 no se exhibirá en la lista de llamadas recientes.

Capítulo 2 − Operación Básica

Operación Básica

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 28-29090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 28-29 2009.6.12 10:12:5 AM2009.6.12 10:12:5 AM

ALMACENAMIENTO DE UN NUMERO DE TELEFONO

La Lista Contact (Contactos) puede almacenar hasta 500 registros (números).

AGREGAR UN NUEVO NUMERO

1. Digite el número de teléfono que desea grabar.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Save (Grabar)].

3. Seleccione Add New Contact (Agregar Nuevo Contacto) y

presione la tecla OK.

4. Seleccione Mobile 1 (Móvil 1), Mobile 2 (Móvil 2), Home

(Residencia), Work (Trabajo) o Fax. Presione la tecla OK.

5. Insiera las informaciones remanentes del contacto (Name

(Nombre), Mobile 1 (Celular 1), Home (Residencia), Work (Trabajo), Email 1, Group (Grupo), Picture (Imagen), Ringtone (Campanilla), Mobile 2 (Celular 2), IM Screen Name (Nombre de la Pantalla IM), Fax, Email 2, Street (Calle), City (Ciudad), State (Estado), Zip Code (Código Postal), Country (País)) y

presione la tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)].

6. Con su tarjeta SIM insertada en el móvil, usted vendrá la siguiente

Mensaje “SAVE A COPY OF THE CONTACT INTO THE SIM CARD?

(¿GRABAR UNA COPIA DEL CONTACTO EN LA TARJETA SIM?)”

7. Seleccione Yes (Sí) o No y presione la tecla OK.

Seleccione Update Existing (Actualizar Existente) para agregar otro número

de teléfono a un contacto ya almacenado en la memoria.

OPCIONES PARA PERSONALIZAR SUS CONTACTOS

Cuando las informaciones básicas de número y nombre de teléfono ya estén almacenadas en la lista Contacts (Contactos), se puede editar y/o personalizar los datos insertados.

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha [Contacts (Contactos)] y

seleccione Contact (Contacto) que desea editar.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Edit (Editar)].

3. Edite las informaciones y presione la tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)]

para grabar.

AGREGAR O MODIFICAR GRUPOS

Para organizar sus contactos en grupos:

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha [Contacts (Contactos)], y

enseguida seleccione el Contacto que desea agregar a un grupo.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Edit (Editar)].

Capítulo 3 − Función Memoria

Función Memoria

3. Seleccione Group (Grupo), presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Set (Confirmar)].

4. Seleccione Family (Familia), Friends (Amigos) o Work (Trabajo),

presione la tecla OK [MARK (MARCAR)], presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Done (Hecho)].

5. Para crear un nuevo grupo, presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[New (Nuevo)]. Digite el nombre del grupo y presione la tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)].

6. Digite las informaciones de contacto restantes y presione la tecla OK

[SAVE (GRABAR)].

MODIFICACION DE UNA CAMPANILLA DE LLAMADA CALL RINGTONE

Usted puede identificar quien está llamando ajustando diferentes campanillas para diferentes números de teléfonos en su Contacts (Contactos).

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha [Contacts (Contactos)],

y enseguida seleccione el Contact (Contacto) cuya campanilla usted desea editar.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Edit (Edición)].

3. Seleccione Ringtone (Campanilla) y presione la Tecla de Función

Izquierda

[Set (Confirmar)].

4. Para oír la campanilla seleccionada, presione la Tecla de Función

Izquierda

[Play (Reproducir)].

Para parar, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda [Stop

(Parar)]. Para seleccionar presione la tecla OK.

5. Presione la Tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)] para grabar.

AGREGAR O ALTERAR LA IDENTIFICACION DE LA IMAGEN

Para seleccionar una imagen o figura por atribuir a una Caller ID (Identificación del Interlocutor):

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha [Contacts (Contactos)], y

enseguida seleccione el Contacto que desea editar.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Edit (Editar)].

3. Seleccione Picture (Imagen) y presione la Tecla de Función

Izquierda

[Set (Confirmar)].

4. Seleccione la imagen por confirmar.

5. Para visualizar la imagen seleccionada, presione la Tecla de Función

Izquierda

[View (Visualizar)].

Función Memoria − Capítulo 3

Función Memoria

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 30-31090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 30-31 2009.6.12 10:12:7 AM2009.6.12 10:12:7 AM

6. Presione la Tecla OK para seleccionar la imagen.

7. Presione la Tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)] para grabar.

AGREGAR O MODIFICAR UNA DIRECCION DE CORREO ELECTRONICO

Para agregar o modificar una dirección de E-mail:

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha [Contacts (Contactos)], y

enseguida seleccione el Contact (Contato) que desea editar.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Edit (Editar)].

3. Seleccione Email 1 o Email 2 para editar.

4. Digite una dirección de E-mail y presione la Tecla OK [SAVE

(GRABAR)] para grabar.

INSERCION DE UN REGISTRO PARA MARCACION RAPIDA

Para agregar un registro Speed Dial (Marcación Rápida):

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha [Contacts (Contactos)],

y enseguida seleccione el Contact (Contacto) por agregar a la función Speed Dial (Marcación Rápida).

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Edit (Editar)].

3. Seleccione el número de teléfono que desea agregar a la función

Speed Dial (Marcación Rápida) y presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

4. Seleccione Set Speed Dial (Ajustar Marcación Rápida) y presione

la tecla OK, seleccione una ubicación Speed Dial y presione la tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)].

5. Para atribuir el registro seleccione Yes (Sí) y enseguida presione la

Tecla OK.

6. Presione la Tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)] para grabar.

AGREGAR O MODIFICAR DE UN NOMBRE DE PANTALLA IM

Para agregar o cambiar un servidor IM Service (Servicio IM):

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha [Contacts (Contactos)], y

enseguida seleccione el Contacto que usted desea editar.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Edit (Editar)].

3. Seleccione IM Screen Name (Nombre de la Pantalla IM),

y enseguida presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Set

(Confirmar)].

4. Seleccione AIM, Yahoo! o WL Messenger y presione la tecla OK.

Capítulo 3 − Función Memoria

Función Memoria

5. Abra la pantalla Screen Name (Nombre de la Pantalla) del usuario y

presione la tecla OK para grabar.

6. Presione la Tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)] para grabar.

EDICION DE REGISTROS DE CONTACTOS

AGREGAR DE UN NUMERO DE TELEFONO DESDE EL MODO IDLE INACTIVO

1. Marque el número de teléfono que desea grabar (hasta 32 dígitos).

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Save (Grabar)].

3. Seleccione Update Existing (Actualización de Registro

Existente) y presione la Tecla OK.

4. Seleccione el contacto por actualizar y presione la Tecla OK.

5. Seleccione Mobile 1 (Móvil 1), Mobile 2 (Móvil 2), Work

(Trabajo) o Fax y presione la tecla OK.

6. Si un número de teléfono ya estuviere atribuido al ítem seleccionado,

seleccione Yes (Sí) para actualizar y enseguida presione la tecla OK .

AGREGAR UN NUMERO DE TELEFONO DESDE LA PANTALLA CONTACT LIST LISTA DE CONTACTOS

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Contacts (Contactos)].

Sus Contacts (Contactos) se exhibirán en orden alfabético.

2. Seleccione el contacto por actualizar y presione la Tecla de Función

Izquierda

[Edit (Editar)].

3. Digite el número en el campo apropiado.

4. Presione la tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)] para grabar.

NUMEROS ESTANDAR

El número de teléfono grabado cuando un Contacto es creado es el Default Number (Número Estándar). Si más de un número es grabado en un registro Contact (Contacto), otro número se puede ajustar como el Número Estándar.

El Número Estándar no se puede borrar. Todo el registro Contact (Contacto)

se puede borrar u otro número puede atribuirse como el Número Estándar permitiendo que usted borre el número original y mantenga el registro Contact (Contacto).

CAMBIO DEL NUMERO ESTANDAR

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Contacts (Contactos)].

Función Memoria − Capítulo 3

Función Memoria

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 32-33090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 32-33 2009.6.12 10:12:9 AM2009.6.12 10:12:9 AM

Sus Contacts (Contactos) se exhibirán en orden alfabético.

2. Seleccione el contacto por actualizar y presione la Tecla de Función

Izquierda

[Edit (Editar)].

3. Seleccione el número por atribuir como el número estándar y pre-

sione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

4. Seleccione Set As Default (Ajustar como Estándar) y presione

la tecla OK.

5. Seleccione Yes (Sí) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK para ajustar

como el número estándar.

6. Presione la Tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)] para grabar.

EDICION DE NUMEROS DE TELEFONO ALMACENADOS

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Contacts (Contactos)].

Los registros de Contacts (Contactos) se exhibirán en orden alfabético.

2. Seleccione el registro Contact (Contacto) que desea editar y

enseguida presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Edit

(Editar)].

3. Seleccione y edite el número de teléfono según sea necesario y

presione la tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)].

DELETING BORRAR

BORRAR UN NUMERO DE TELEFONO DE UN REGISTRO DE CONTACTO

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Contacts (Contactos)].

Sus Contacts (Contactos) se exhibirán en orden alfabético.

2. Seleccione o Contact (Contactos) por actualizar y enseguida presione

la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Edit (Editar)].

3. Seleccione el número de teléfono por borrar.

4. Presione y mantenga presionada la Tecla Clear (Borrar)

para

borrar el número.

5. Presione la Tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)] para grabar.

BORRAR UN REGISTRO EN CONTACTS CONTACTOS

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Contacts (Contactos)] y

seleccione el contacto por borrar.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)],

seleccione Erase (Borrar) y presione la tecla OK.

Capítulo 3 − Función Memoria

Función Memoria

3. Seleccione Yes (Sí) y presione la tecla OK para borrar.

BORRAR UN NUMERO DE MARCACION RAPIDA

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Contacts (Contactos)] y

seleccione el contacto por editar.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Edit (Editar)].

3. Seleccione el número de teléfono atribuido al marcado rápido y

presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

4. Seleccione Remove Speed Dial (Remover Marcado Rápido) y

presione la Tecla OK.

5. Seleccione Yes (Sí) y presione la Tecla OK para borrar.

6. Presione la Tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)] para grabar.

INSERCION DE LETRAS, NUMEROS Y SIMBOLOS

El modo de inserción DE TEXTO (editor Alpha (alfabético)) permite la inserción de texto, números y signos. O modo de inserción estándar es [Abc].

Tecla Función de las Teclas

Abc: Presione para cambiar el modo. [T9Word] [Abc] [ABC] [123]

[Symbols] (Símbolos) [Quick Text] (Texto Rápido)

Next: Presione para visualizar la palabra siguiente correspondiente en

el modo de previsión.

Space (Espacio): Presione para seleccionar la palabra en el modo de

previsión y/o agregar un espacio.

Caps Lock: Presione para seleccionar la condición de la letra (mayús-

cula/minúscula) de la inserción del texto estándar o en modo de entrada de texto. [Abc], [ABC] y [abc], indican la inserción de texto estándar (estándar). [T9Word], [T9WORD] y [T9word] indican la inserción de texto previsible. Presione y mantenga presionada para cambiar el modo. [Abc] -> [123] -> [T9 word] -> [Abc].

Clear: Presione para borrar un caractere a la izquierda del cursor.

Presione y mantenga presionada para borrar una palabra entera.

Función Memoria − Capítulo 3

Función Memoria

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 34-35090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 34-35 2009.6.12 10:12:10 AM2009.6.12 10:12:10 AM

MODO MULTITAP MULTIPLES PRESIONADOS

Utilice el teclado alfanumérico para insertar letras, números y caracteres.

Cada una de las teclas a continuación recurrirá a través de estas opciones secuenciales indicadas por idioma. El límite es 160 carac teres. Presione la tecla identificada con la letra blanco una vez para la primera letra presione dos veces para la segunda letra y así sucesivamente. Presione y mantenga presionada la tecla identificada con el número blanco para este número.

Tecla Inglés Español

. @ ? ! - , & : ' / y 1

a b c 2 a á b c 2

d e f 3 d e é f 3

g h i 4 g h i í 4

j k l 5

m n o 6 m n ñ o ó 6

p q r s 7

t u v 8

Tecla Inglés Español

w x y z 9

MODO PREDICTIVE PREVISION

El modo T9 Word incorpora un diccionario incorporado para determinar una palabra con base en los caracteres ya inser tados. Se puede insertar una palabra más rápidamente presionando cada tecla una vez por caractere. Para digitar la palabra “Hello’, siga los siguientes pasos:

1. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda [Message (Mensaje)],

seleccione New Message (Nuevo Mensaje) y presione la tecla OK.

Acceso rápido: En el modo Idle (Inactivo), presione la tecla NewTXT

Message (Nuevo Mensaje de Texto) .

2. Seleccione TXT Message (Mensaje de Texto) y presione la tecla

OK.

3. Marque el número de teléfono o dirección de e-mail en el campo “To

(Para)” y presione la tecla OK. En el campo Tex t (Tex to ), presione

la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Abc], seleccione T9 Word y

presione la Tecla OK.

Capítulo 3 − Función Memoria

Función Memoria

4. Presione , , , , para digitar “Hello

(Hola)”. Presione la tecla

para visualizar la palabra siguiente.

5. Para seleccionar la palabra y agregar un espacio, presione la tecla

MODO NUMBER NUMERICO

Permite que usted insiera números.

1. A partir de la pantalla de inserción de texto, presione la Tecla de

Función Izquierda [Abc], seleccione 123 y presione la tecla OK.

2. Presione las teclas correspondientes para insertar el número.

MODO SYMBOL SIMBOLOS

Permite que usted insiera símbolos.

1. A partir de la pantalla de inserción de texto, presione la Tecla de

Función Izquierda [Abc], seleccione Symbols (Símbolos) y presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el símbolo que desea insertar utilizando la Tecla de

Dirección

. Presione la tecla OK para seleccionar.

MARCACION CON UNO, DOS O TRES TOQUES

Ideal para números marcados frecuentemente, esta función permite que los registros de contacto sean marcados a través del teclado utilizando solamente una, dos o tres teclas. Para detalles sobre la atribución a Speed Dial (Marcación Rápida), ver la página 43.

MARCACION POR UN TOQUE:

Presione y mantenga presionada la tecla numérica durante más de 1 segundo que usted desea conectar.

MARCACION POR DOS TOQUES:

Presione el primer dígito y presione y mantenga presionada la tecla del segundo dígito del número por marcar.

MARCACION CON TRES TOQUES:

Presione el primero y segundo dígitos y enseguida presione y mantenga presionado el tercer dígito del número por marcar.

Función Memoria − Capítulo 3

Función Memoria

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 36-37090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 36-37 2009.6.12 10:12:11 AM2009.6.12 10:12:11 AM

FUNCIONES DEL MENU

CAPITULO 4

FUNCIONES DEL MENU

Este capítulo describe el acceso al menú y la utilización de sus funciones y

características para personalizar su móvil.

Capítulo 3 − Función Memoria

Nota

New contact (Nuevo contacto)

Contact list (Lista de contactos)

Backup assistant (Asistente de backup)

Groups (Grupos)

Speed dials (Marcaciones rápidas)

En caso de emergencia

My name card (Mi tarjeta de visitas)

Recent calls (Llamadas recientes)

Missed calls (Llamadas no

contestadas)

Received calls (Llamadas recibidas)

Dialed calls (Llamadas realizadas)

Blocked (Bloqueadas)

All (Todas)

Visualización de timers

Bluetooth

Ajustes de sonido

Ajustes de la pantalla

Ajustes del móvil

Ajustes de llamadas

Memory (Memoria)

Phone info (Informaciones sobre el

móvil)

SIM info (Informaciones sobre la tarjeta

SIM)

Set up wizard (Tutorial de

configuración)

Mandos de voz

Calculator (Calculadora)

Tip calculator (Calculadora de propina)

Calendar (Calendario)

Alarm clock (Reloj de alarma)

Stop watch (Cronómetro)

World clock (Reloj mundial)

Unit converter (Convertidor de uni-

dades)

Notepad (Bloc de notas)

My Verizon (Mi Verizon)

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 38-39090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 38-39 2009.6.12 10:12:13 AM2009.6.12 10:12:13 AM

Se pueden recuperar los registros por el nombre o por el grupo.

NEW CONTACT NUEVO CONTACTO

PARA AGREGAR UN NUEVO NUMERO A SUS CONTACTOS

Para detalles sobre la adición de un nuevo contacto, ver la página 30.

CONTACT LIST LISTA DE CONTACTOS

Usted puede revisar todos los registros almacenados en su Contact List (Lista de Contactos) o ubicar rápidamente un registro insertando un nombre o su caractere.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione Contact List (Lista de Contactos) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Insiera un nombre en el campo Go To (Vaya Hacia) o seleccione

el contacto.

3. Para editar el contacto, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Edit (Editar)]. Para visualizar los detalles, presione la tecla OK [VIEW (VISUALIZAR)].

Acceso Rápido: Acceda la Contact List (Lista de Contactos) presionando la

Tecla de Función Derecha

BACKUP ASSISTANT ASISTENTE DE BACKUP

Backup Assistant es un servicio inalámbrico que graba una copia de su agenda electrónica de su teléfono en un sitio web seguro. Si su teléfono es perdido, robado o dañado, esta función recuperará su agenda electrónica en el nuevo teléfono – ¡esta es una operación inalámbrica! Programe diariamente backups automáticos o genere manualmente los backups de su agenda electrónica (lista de contactos) según desee. Haga el login en su cuenta en la Internet y obtenga el acceso total a su agenda electrónica. Usted puede visualizar, imprimir, agregar, borrar y editar contactos. ¡Las modificaciones se enviarán a su teléfono con un clic! Acceda el sitio web: https://www.verizonwireless.com/backupassistant/.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione Backup Assistant (A sistente de

Backup) y presione la tecla OK para activar la aplicación.

GROUPS GRUPOS

Permite la clasificación de registros telefónicos en grupos con hasta10 contactos en cada grupo. Los grupos estándar – Family (Familia), Friends (Amigos) o Work (Trabajo) – no se pueden borrar o renombrar.

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Contactos

PARA AGREGAR UN NUEVO GRUPO

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos)

y presione la tecla OK. Seleccione Groups (Grupos) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[New (Nuevo)].

3. Digite un nuevo nombre de grupo y presione la Tecla OK [SAVE

(GRABAR)].

PARA ATRIBUIR UN NUMERO DE TELEFONO A UN GRUPO

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos)

y presione la tecla OK. Seleccione Groups (Grupos) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el grupo al cual el contacto se agregará y presione la tecla

OK [VIEW (VISUALIZAR)].

3. Para agregar un contacto, presione la Tecla OK [ADD (AGREGAR)].

Seleccione el contacto por agregar y presione la Tecla OK [MARK

(MARCAR)] y enseguida presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Done (Hecho)] para agregar.

PARA CAMBIAR EL NOMBRE DEL GRUPO

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos)

y presione la tecla OK. Seleccione Groups (Grupos) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el grupo por renombrar, presione la Tecla de Función

Derecha

[Options (Opciones)], seleccione Rename

(Renombrar), y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

3. Edite el nombre del grupo y presione la tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)].

BORRAR GRUPOS

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos)

y presione la tecla OK. Seleccione Groups (Grupos) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el grupo por borrar y presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)]. Seleccione Erase (Borrar) y presione

la tecla OK.

3. Seleccione Yes (Sí) y presione la tecla OK para borrar el grupo.

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Contactos

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 40-41090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 40-41 2009.6.12 10:12:15 AM2009.6.12 10:12:15 AM

PARA ENVIAR UN MENSAJE DE TEXTO A UN GRUPO

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos)

y presione la tecla OK. Seleccione Groups (Grupos) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el grupo al cual se enviará un Mensaje y presione la Tecla

de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

3. Seleccione New TXT Message (Nuevo Mensaje de Texto) y pre-

sione la tecla OK y enseguida digite el Mensaje.

4. Para enviar, presione la tecla OK [SEND (ENVIAR)] o presione la Tecla

SEND .

Para detalles sobre la digitación de mensajes de texto, ver la página

114.

PARA ENVIAR UN MENSAJE DE IMAGEN A UN GRUPO

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos)

y presione la tecla OK. Seleccione Groups (Grupos) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el grupo al cual desea enviar un Mensaje y presione la

Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

3. Seleccione New Picture Message (Nuevo Mensaje con Imagen)

y presione la tecla OK.

4. Seleccione Picture (Imagen) y presione la Tecla de Función

Izquierda

[My Pics (Mis Imágenes)]. Seleccione la imagen por

insertar y presione la Tecla OK para seleccionar.

5. Digite las informaciones remanentes del Mensaje y presione la tecla

OK [SEND (ENVIAR)] o presione la tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

Para detalles sobre la grabación de un Mensaje con imagen, ver la página 115.

PARA ENVIAR UN MENSAJE DE VOZ A UN GRUPO

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos)

y presione la tecla OK. Seleccione Groups (Grupos) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el grupo al cual se enviará un mensaje de voz y presione la

Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

3. Seleccione New Voice Message (Nuevo Mensaje de Voz) y

presione la tecla OK.

4. Presione la Tecla OK para iniciar la grabación. Presione la tecla OK

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Contactos

[STOP (DETENER)] para terminar la grabación.

5. Digite cualquier información adicional al Mensaje. Para enviar

presione la tecla OK [SEND (ENVIAR)] o presione la tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

Para detalles sobre la grabación de un Mensaje de voz, ver la página

116.

SPEED DIALS MARCACIONES RAPIDAS

Se pueden realizar las llamadas de números almacenados en el grupo de marcación rápida presionando y manteniendo presionada la tecla numérica deseada en el teclado. Para un número de 2 dígitos, presione el primer número (tecla) y enseguida presione y mantenga presionada la segunda tecla numérica. Para un número de ubicación de 3 dígitos, presione el primer número y el segundo número y enseguida presione y mantenga presionada tecla del tercer número.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos)

y presione la tecla OK. Seleccione Speed Dials (Marcaciones

Rápidas) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione la posición Speed Dial (Marcación Rápida) o insiera el

dígito Speed Dial (que corresponde al número almacenado) y

enseguida presione la tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)].

3. Seleccione el Contact (Contacto) y presione la tecla OK.

4. Seleccione el número que desea atribuir a la marcación rápida y

enseguida presione la tecla OK.

5. Seleccione Yes (Sí) y presione la Tecla OK.

Se exhibirá el mensaje Unassigned (No atribuido) si la posición estuviere

disponible.

PARA BORRAR UN REGISTRO DE MARCACION RAPIDA GRABADO

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos)

y presione la tecla OK. Seleccione Speed Dials (Marcaciones

Rápidas) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el registroe Speed Dial (Marcación Rápida) para borrar.

3. Presione la tecla de Función Derecha

[Remove (Remover)].

4. Seleccione Yes (Sí) y presione la Tecla OK.

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Contactos

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 42-43090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 42-43 2009.6.12 10:12:16 AM2009.6.12 10:12:16 AM

EN CASO DE EMERGENCIA

Su móvil tiene un menú especial para organizar sus contactos de emergencia y informaciones personales.

PARA ATRIBUIR CONTACTOS DE EMERGENCIA

Siga los procedimientos siguientes para registrar un Contact (Contacto) por contactar en caso de emergencia o para registrar un número de registro médico u otras informaciones personales.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione In Case of Emergenc y (En caso de

Emergencia) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Contact 1 (Contacto 1), Contac t 2 (Contacto 2) o

Contact 3 (Contacto 3) y presione la tecla OK [ADD (AGREGAR)].

3. Cuando seleccione desde ADD CONTACT AGREGAR CONTACTO,

seleccione From Contacts (Desde Contactos) y presione la tecla OK.

4. Seleccione el registro de contacto deseado y presione la tecla OK.

5. Cuando un nuevo contacto es agregado, seleccione New Contact

(Nuevo Contacto) y presione la tecla OK.

6. Insiera las informaciones del contacto y presione la tecla OK [SAVE

(GRABAR)].

7. El nombre del contacto se exhibirá envés de Contact 1 (Contacto

1), Contact 2 (Contacto 2) o Contact 3 (Contacto 3).

PARA REATRIBUIR CONTACTOS DE EMERGENCIA

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione In Case of Emergenc y (En caso de

Emergencia) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el contacto por reatribuirse y presione la Tecla de Función

Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

3. Seleccione Re-assign (Reatribuir) y presione la tecla OK .

4. Seleccione From Contacts (Desde Contac tos) y presione la

Tecla OK. Seleccione un contacto en su Contact List (Lista de

Contactos). Cuando agregue un nuevo contacto, seleccione New Contact (Nuevo Contacto) y presione la tecla OK.

5. Presione la tecla OK.

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Contactos

PARA BORRAR CONTACTOS DE EMERGENCIA ATRIBUIDOS

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione In Case of Emergenc y (En caso de

Emergencia) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el contacto por borrar y presione la Tecla de Función

Derecha

[Options (Opciones].

3. Seleccione Unassign (Cancelar Atribución) y presione la Tecla OK.

PARA LLAMAR UN CONTACTO DE EMERGENCIA ATRIBUIDO

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione In Case of Emergenc y (En caso de

Emergencia) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el contacto por llamar y presione la Tecla de Función

Izquierda

[Call (Llamada)] o presione la Tecla SEND (ENVIAR)

PARA AGREGAR INFORMACIONES PERSONALES

Para almacenar un Número de Registro Médico u otras informaciones que puedan ser útiles en caso de emergencia:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione In Case of Emergenc y (En caso de

Emergencia) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Personal Info (Informaciones Personales) y presione

la Tecla OK [VIEW (VISUALIZAR)].

3. Seleccione Note 1 (Nota 1), Note 2 (Nota 2) o Note 3 (Nota 3) y

presione la Tecla OK [ADD (AGREGAR)].

4. Insiera las informaciones y presione la Tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)].

5. Las informaciones insertadas ahora se exhibirán envés de la Note 1

(Nota 1), Note 2 (Nota 2) o Note 3 (Nota 3).

PARA EDITAR LAS INFORMACIONES PERSONALES

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione In Case of Emergenc y (En caso de

Emergencia) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Personal Info (Informaciones Personales) presione la

Tecla OK [VIEW (VISUALIZAR)].

3. Seleccione la nota por editar y presione la Tecla OK [VIEW

(VISUALIZAR)].

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Contactos

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 44-45090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 44-45 2009.6.12 10:12:17 AM2009.6.12 10:12:17 AM

4. Presione la Tecla OK [EDIT (EDITAR)]. Edite la nota y presione la Tecla

OK [SAVE (GRABAR)].

PARA BORRAR LAS INFORMACIONES PERSONALES GRABADAS

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione In Case of Emergenc y (En caso de

Emergencia) y enseguida presione la tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Personal Info (Informaciones Personales) y presione

la Tecla OK [VIEW (VISUALIZAR)].

3. Seleccione la nota por borrar y presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Erase (Borrar)].

4. Seleccione Yes (Sí) y presione la Tecla OK.

MY NAME CARD MI TARJETA DE VISITAS

Una Name Card (Tarjeta de Visitas) con el número del teléfono se exhibirá automáticamente.

EDIÇÃO DE MY NAME CARD MI TARJETA DE VISITAS

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione My Name Card (Mi Tarjeta de

Visitas) y presione la Tecla OK.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Edit (Editar)].

3. Edite las Opciones MY NAME CARD MI TARJETA DE VISITAS

y presione la Tecla OK [SAVE (GRABAR)] para grabar las modificaciones.

ENVIO DE LA TARJETA DE VISITAS A TRAVES DE UN MENSAJE DE TEXTO O MENSAJE CON IMAGEN

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione My Name Card (Mi Tarjeta de

Visitas) y presione la Tecla OK.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Send (Enviar)].

3. Seleccione TXT Message (Mensaje de Texto) o Picture Message

(Mensaje con Imagen) y presione la Tecla OK.

4. Insiera las informaciones de contacto del destinatario en el campo To

(Para) y presione la Tecla OK.

5. Insiera cualesquier informaciones de mensajes adicionales y presione

la Tecla OK [SEND (ENVIAR)].

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Contactos

ENVIO DE UNA TARJETA DE VISITAS CON UN MENSAJE DE VOZ

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione My Name Card (Mi Tarjeta de

Visitas) y presione la Tecla OK.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Send (Enviar)].

3. Seleccione Voice Message (Mensaje de Voz) y presione la Tecla OK.

4. Para grabar un nuevo Voice Message (Mensaje de Voz), presione

la Tecla OK para iniciar la grabación. Presione la Tecla OK [STOP

(PARAR)] para detener la grabación y grábelo.

5. Digite las informaciones de contacto del destinatario en el campo To

(Para) y presione la Tecla OK.

6. Digite cualesquier informaciones adicionales del mensaje y presione

la Tecla OK [SEND (ENVIAR)].

ENVIO DE UNA TARJETA DE VISITAS A OTRO DISPOSITIVO BLUETOOTH

Active la función Bluetooth en ambos dispositivos (pasos 1-4) y ajuste

Discovery Mode (Modo de Explotación) en On (Activar). Por favor, refiérase

a Bluetooth en la página 52.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Contacts (Contactos) y

presione la tecla OK. Seleccione My Name Card (Mi Tarjeta de

Visitas) y presione la Tecla OK.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Send (Enviar)].

3. Seleccione Via Bluetooth y presione la Tecla OK.

4. Con la opción Add New Device (Agregar Nuevo Dispositivo)

seleccionada, presione la Tecla OK. El móvil exhibirá el mensaje en la pantalla LCD: PLACE DEVICE YOU ARE CONNECTING TO IN

DISCOVERABLE MODE (AJUSTE EL DISPOSITIVO QUE USTED ESTA CONECTANDO EN EL MODO DE EXPLOTACION). Presione la

Tecla OK.

5. Seleccione el dispositivo deseado y presione la Tecla OK [PAIR

(PAREO)].

6. Si fuere aplicable, el dispositivo podrá solicitar una Contraseña.

Consulte las instrucciones para el accesorio Bluetooth® (vendido en separado) para la contraseña apropiada (típicamente 0000 – 4 ceros). Digite la contraseña y presione la Tecla OK.

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Contactos

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 46-47090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 46-47 2009.6.12 10:12:18 AM2009.6.12 10:12:18 AM

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Llamadas Recientes

RECEIVED CALLS LLAMADAS RECIBIDAS

Exhibe las informaciones sobre las 90 llamadas recibidas más recientes.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Recent Calls (Llamadas

Recientes) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK. Seleccione Received (Recibidas) y presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione un registro y presione la Tecla OK [OPEN (ABRIR)] para

visualizar el registro.

3. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)]

para acceder las siguientes Opciones:

•

Save to Contact (Grabar en Contactos): Para almacenar el número de

teléfono en Contacts (Contactos).

Si la opción de grabar no es exhibida, este registro ya estará en su Contacts

List (Lista de Contactos).

•

Details (Detalles): Exhibe los detalles sobre el interlocutor si estuviere en

Contacts (Contactos).

•

Erase (Borrar): Borra una lista de llamadas.

•

Lock/Unlock (Bloquear/Desbloquear): Para bloquear o desbloquear una

lista de llamadas.

•

View Timers (Visualizar Timers): Exhibe el tiempo de uso.

4. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda [Message (Mensaje)]

para acceder las siguientes Opciones.

•

TXT Message (Mensaje de Texto): Envía un mensaje de Texto al contacto.

•

Picture Message (Mensaje con Imagen): Envía un mensaje con Imagen

al contacto.

•

Voice Message (Mensaje de Voz): Envía un mensaje de Voz al contacto.

DIALED CALLS LLAMADAS REALIZADAS

Exhibe informaciones sobre los 90 números marcados más recientemente.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Recent Calls (Llamadas

Recientes) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK. Seleccione Dialed (Realizadas) y presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione un registro y presione la Tecla OK [OPEN (ABRIR)] para

visualizar el registro.

3. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)]

para acceder las siguientes Opciones:

•

Save to Contact (Grabar en Contactos): Para almacenar el número de

teléfono en Contacts (Contactos).

Si la opción de grabar no es exhibida, este registro ya estará en su Contacts

List (Lista de Contactos).

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Llamadas Recientes

7. La pantalla exhibirá Before Connecting to (Antes de Conectar

a) (Nombre del Dispositivo), seleccione Always Ask (Siempre Preguntar) o Always Connect (Siempre conectar) y presione

la Tecla OK.

8. Las informaciones se enviarán a través del dispositivo Bluetooth al

dispositivo de recepción.

RECENT CALLS LLAMADAS RECIENTES

El menú Recent Calls (Llamadas Recientes) es una lista de los últimos números de teléfono o registros Contact (Contacto) para llamadas realizadas, recibidas o no-contestadas. Esta lista es continuamente actualizada cuando nuevos números sean agregados al inicio de la lista y los registros más antiguos se removerán de la parte inferior de la lista.

MISSED CALLS LLAMADAS NO CONTESTADAS

Exhibe informaciones sobre las 90 llamadas no contestadas más recientes.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Recent Calls (Llamadas

Recientes) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK. Seleccione Missed (No Contestadas) y presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione un registro y presione la Tecla OK [OPEN (ABRIR)] para

visualizar el registro.

3. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)]

para acceder las siguientes Opciones:

•

Save to Contact (Grabar en Contactos): Para almacenar el número de

teléfono en Contacts (Contactos).

Si la opción de grabar no es exhibida, este registro ya estará en su Contacts

List (Lista de Contactos).

•

Details (Detalles): Exhibe los detalles sobre el interlocutor si estuviere en

Contacts (Contactos).

•

Erase (Borrar): Borra una lista de llamadas.

•

Lock/Unlock (Bloquear/Desbloquear): Para bloquear o desbloquear una

lista de llamadas.

•

View Timers (Visualizar Timers): Exhibe el tiempo de uso.

4. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda [Message (Mensaje)]

para acceder las siguientes Opciones.

•

TXT Message (Mensaje de Texto): Envía un mensaje de Texto al contacto.

•

Picture Message (Mensaje con Imagen): Envía un mensaje con Imagen

al contacto.

•

Voice Message (Mensaje de Voz): Envía un mensaje de Voz al contacto.

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 48-49090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 48-49 2009.6.12 10:12:19 AM2009.6.12 10:12:19 AM

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Llamadas Recientes

Para detalles sobre Restricciones, ver la página 74.

ALL TODAS

Exhibe informaciones sobre las Llamadas recibidas, marcadas y no contestadas más Recientes.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Recent Calls (Llamadas

Recientes) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK. Seleccione All (Todas)

y presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione un registro y presione la Tecla OK [OPEN (ABRIR)] para

visualizar el registro.

3. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)]

para acceder las siguientes Opciones:

•

Save to Contact (Grabar en Contactos): Para almacenar el número de

teléfono en Contacts (Contactos).

Si la opción de grabar no es exhibida, este registro ya estará en su Contacts

List (Lista de Contactos).

•

Details (Detalles): Exhibe los detalles sobre el interlocutor si estuviere en

Contacts (Contactos).

•

Erase (Borrar): Borra una lista de llamadas.

•

Lock/Unlock (Bloquear/Desbloquear): Para bloquear o desbloquear una

lista de llamadas.

•

View Timers (Visualizar Timers): Exhibe el tiempo de uso.

4. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda [Message (Mensaje)]

para acceder las siguientes Opciones.

•

TXT Message (Mensaje de Texto): Envía un mensaje de Texto al contacto.

•

Picture Message (Mensaje con Imagen): Envía un mensaje con Imagen

al contacto.

•

Voice Message (Mensaje de Voz): Envía un mensaje de Voz al contacto.

VISUALIZACION DE TIMERS

Los timers permiten que usted verificar el tiempo de uso y administrar sus llamadas.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Recent Calls (Llamadas

Recientes) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK. Seleccione View Timers (Visualizar Timers) y presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Last Call (Última Llamada), All Calls (Todas las

Llamadas), Received Calls (Llamadas Recibidas), Dialed Calls (Llamadas Marcadas), Roaming Calls (Llamadas en Roaming), Transmit Data (Datos Transmitidos), Received Data (Datos Recibidos), Total Data (Total de Datos), Last Reset (Última Reiniciación), Lifetime Calls (Llamadas Permanentes) y

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Llamadas Recientes

•

Details (Detalles): Exhibe los detalles sobre el interlocutor si estuviere en

Contacts (Contactos).

•

Erase (Borrar): Borra una lista de llamadas.

•

Lock/Unlock (Bloquear/Desbloquear): Para bloquear o desbloquear una

lista de llamadas.

•

View Timers (Visualizar Timers): Exhibe el tiempo de uso.

4. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda [Message (Mensaje)]

para acceder las siguientes Opciones.

•

TXT Message (Mensaje de Texto): Envía un mensaje de Texto al contacto.

•

Picture Message (Mensaje con Imagen): Envía un mensaje con Imagen

al contacto.

•

Voice Message (Mensaje de Voz): Envía un mensaje de Voz al contacto.

BLOCKED BLOQUEADAS

Se exhibirá este menú solamente cuando la restricción para Incoming Calls (Llamadas Recibidas) esté configurada.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Recent Calls (Llamadas

Recientes) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK. Seleccione Blocked (Bloqueadas) y presione la Tecla OK.

2. Digite el código de bloqueo de cuatro dígitos y presione la Tecla Ok.

El código de bloqueo estándar es los últimos 4 dígitos del número de

su teléfono móvil.

3. Seleccione un registro y presione la Tecla OK [OPEN (ABRIR)] para

visualizar el registro.

4. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)]

para acceder las siguientes Opciones:

•

Save to Contact (Grabar en Contactos): Para almacenar el número de

teléfono en Contacts (Contactos).

Si la opción de grabar no es exhibida, este registro ya estará en su Contacts

List (Lista de Contactos).

•

Details (Detalles): Exhibe los detalles sobre el interlocutor si estuviere en

Contacts (Contactos).

•

Erase (Borrar): Borra una lista de llamadas.

•

Lock/Unlock (Bloquear/Desbloquear): Para bloquear o desbloquear una

lista de llamadas.

•

View Timers (Visualizar Timers): Exhibe el tiempo de uso.

5. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda [Message (Mensaje)]

para acceder las siguientes Opciones.

•

TXT Message (Mensaje de Texto): Envía un mensaje de Texto al contacto.

•

Picture Message (Mensaje con Imagen): Envía un mensaje con Imagen

al contacto.

•

Voice Message (Mensaje de Voz): Envía un mensaje de Voz al contacto.

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 50-51090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 50-51 2009.6.12 10:12:21 AM2009.6.12 10:12:21 AM

Lifetime Data Counter (Contador de Datos Permanentes) para

visualizar las informaciones.

3. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Reset (Reiniciar)] para

Reiniciar el timer seleccionado.

4. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Reset All (Reiniciar

Todas)] para Reiniciar todos los timers.

BLUETOOTH

La tecnología de conectividad Bluetooth habilita las conexiones inalámbricas entre dispositivos electrónicos. Si fuere conectado a un dispositivo Altavoz Bluetooth, usted podrá utilizar su móvil con mayor libertad. Considerando que dispositivos con la conectividad Bluetooth se comunican utilizando ondas de radio, su móvil y el otro dispositivo no necesitan estar en una línea de visión directa. Los dos dispositivos solamente necesitan estar a como máximo, 10 metros uno del otro. La conexión puede estar sujeta a las interferencias resultantes de obstáculos como por ejemplo, paredes u otros dispositivos electrónicos. Este dispositivo está en conformidad con Bluetooth especificación 2, soportando los siguientes perfiles: Headset (Audífono), Handsfree (Altavoz), Phonebook Access (Acceso a los Contactos) y Object Push for vCard. Para asegurar la operación integrada entre otros dispositivos que soportan la tecnología Bluetooth, utilice accesorios aprobados para este modelo. Verifique

con los fabricantes de los accesorios para determinar su compatibilidad con este móvil. Podrá existir restricciones al uso de la tecnología Bluetooth en algunos lugares. Verifique con las autoridades locales o Verizon Wireless. Si usted desea más informaciones sobre esta función, acceda el sitio Web de la organización Bluetooth Technolgy: https://www.bluetooth.org/.

El uso de la tecnología Bluetooth o el permiso de la operación de tales

funciones en segundo plan mientras utiliza otras funciones incrementará el uso de la carga de la batería y reducirá la vida útil de la batería.

BLUETOOTH ON/OFF ACTIVACION/DESACTIVACION DEL BLUETOOTH

Para Activar Bluetooth® :

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Bluetooth y presione la

Tecla OK.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Turn On/Turn Off

(Activar/Desactivar)].

ADD NEW DEVICE AGREGAR NUEVO DISPOSITIVO

Pareo es el proceso que permite que el móvil localice, establezca y registre una conexión 1-para-1 con el dispositivo blanco.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Bluetooth y presione la

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Ajustes

Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Add New Device (Agregar Nuevo Dispositivo) y

presione la Tecla OK.

3. Si la alimentación para Bluetooth® esté desactivada, se exhibirá el

siguiente mensaje en la pantalla: TURN BLUETOOTH POWER ON?

ACTIVAR LA ALIMENTACIÓN DEL DISPOSITIVO BLUETOOTH?

Presione la Tecla OK para seleccionar Yes (Sí).

4. El móvil exhibirá el siguiente mensaje en la pantalla: PLACE

DEVICE YOU ARE CONNECTING TO IN DISCOVERABLE MODE AJUSTE EL DISPOSITIVO SIENDO CONECTADO AL MODO DE EXPLORACIÓN. Presione la Tecla OK.

5. El dispositivo se exhibirá en el menú Add New Device (Agregar

Nuevo Dispositivo). Seleccione el dispositivo con el cual el pareo se

realizará y presione la Tecla OK [PAIR (PAREO)].

6. Si fuere aplicable, el teléfono podrá solicitar la contraseña. Consulte

las instrucciones del accesorio Bluetooth® (vendido en separado) para la contraseña apropiada (generalmente 0000. 4 ceros). Insiera la contraseña y presione la Tecla OK.

Usted no necesita insertar la contraseña para el pareo cuando la contraseña

del Telefone Bluetooth® o del kit altavoz sea 0000.

7. Connect to (Conectar a): (nombre del dispositivo) se exhibirá en la

pantalla. Seleccione Yes (Sí) y presione la Tecla OK.

8. Una vez conectado, el dispositivo indicado será visualizado en menú

Bluetooth ye l icono del dispositivo Bluetooth® conectado

se exhibirá en la parte superior de la pantalla LCD cuando esté conectado al dispositivo Bluetooth®.

•

En el menú Bluetooth, usted puede desconectar el dispositivo conectado con

un icono presionando la Tecla OK [DROP DESCONEXIÓN]. De otra forma, se puede reconectar presionando la Tecla OK nuevamente.

•

Cuando un dispositivo de audio es conectado, se puede seleccionar otro

dispositivo y la conexión se transferirá automáticamente del dispositivo de audio al otro.

•

Si son exhibidos múltiples dispositivos, seleccione los dispositivos que desea

conectar.

OPCIONES

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Bluetooth y presione la

Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el dispositivo sometido al pareo.

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Ajustes

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 52-53090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 52-53 2009.6.12 10:12:22 AM2009.6.12 10:12:22 AM

3. Si un dispositivo de audio estuviere conectado, presione la Tecla de

Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)], para seleccionar entre

las siguientes Opciones:

•

Remove Device (Remover Dispositivo): Remueve un dispositivo de la

lista de pareo.

•

Rename Device (Renombrar Dispositivo): Renombra un dispositivo

pareado.

•

Ser vice Discovery (Explorar Servicio): Busca ser vicios soportado por el

dispositivo seleccionado.

•

Send Name Card (Enviar Tarjeta de Visitas): Envía la agenda electrónica

almacenada a un dispositivo seleccionado (si el dispositivo seleccionado es HFK y soporta OPP).

•

Device Info (Informaciones sobre o Dispositivo): Exhibe informaciones

sobre o dispositivo.

4. Si un PC u otro dispositivo estuviere conectado, presione la Tecla de

Función Derecha [Options (Opciones)], para seleccionar entre las siguientes Opciones:

•

Remove Device (Remover Dispositivo): Remueve un dispositivo de la

lista de pareo.

•

Rename Device (Renombrar Dispositivo): Renombra un dispositivo

pareado.

•

Incoming Security (Seguridad de Dispositivos Conectados): Ajusta

permisos para conexión a un dispositivo conectado.

•

Ser vice Discovery (Explotar Servicios): Busca los ser vicios soportados por

el dispositivo seleccionado.

•

Send Name Card (Enviar Tarjeta de Visitas): Envía la agenda electrónica

almacenada para un dispositivo seleccionado.

•

Get Name Card (Obtener Tarjeta de Visitas): Solicita y recibe informa-

ciones de la Name Card (Tarjeta de Visitas) del interlocutor.

•

Device Info (Informaciones del Dispositivo): Exhibe las informaciones

del dispositivo.

AJUSTES

MY PHONE NAME NOMBRE DE MI MOVIL

Para editar el nombre Bluetooth® de su móvil.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Bluetooth y presione la

Tecla OK.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

3. Seleccione My Phone Name (Mi Nombre de Teléfono) y presione

la Tecla OK.

4. Digite un nuevo nombre personalizado.

5. Presione la Tecla OK para grabar.

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Ajustes

DISCOVERY MODE MODO DE EXPLORACION

Para ajustar si su dispositivo se puede localizar por otros dispositivos Bluetooth® en el área de uso:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Bluetooth y presione la

Tecla OK.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

3. Seleccione Discovery Mode (Modo de Exploración) y presione

la Tecla OK.

Si la alimentación del dispositivo Bluetooth no está activada, se exhibirá un

prompt para conectar el dispositivo para seguir.

4. Seleccione On (Activar) u Off (Desactivar) y enseguida presione

la Tecla OK.

PERFILES SOPORTADOS

Para visualizar las descripciones rápidas de los perfiles sopor tados por el móvil:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Bluetooth y presione la

Tecla OK.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

3. Seleccione Supported Profiles (Perfiles Soportados) y presione

la Tecla OK.

4. Seleccione un perfil y presione la Tecla OK [VIEW (VISUALIZAR)]

para detalles adicionales.

PAREO AUTOMATICO DEL DISPOSITIVO ALTAVOZ

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Bluetooth y presione la

Tecla OK.

2. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

3. Seleccione Auto Pair Handsfree (Pareo Automático del

Dispositivo Altavoz) y presione la Tecla OK.

4. Seleccione On (Activar) u Off (Desactivar) y presione la Tecla OK.

AJUSTES DE SONIDO

CONFIGURACION FACIL

Para ajustar el volumen del teléfono utilizando la función Easy Set up Wizard (Tutorial de Configuración Fácil):

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Easy Set-up (Configuración Fácil) y presione la Tecla OK.

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Ajustes

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 54-55090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 54-55 2009.6.12 10:12:23 AM2009.6.12 10:12:23 AM

2. Seleccione el tipo de campanilla y presione la Tecla OK [SET

(CONFIRMAR)]. Para saltar el paso, presione la Tecla de Función

Derecha

[Skip (Saltar)].

3. Seleccione la campanilla y presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)].

Para oír la campanilla, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda [Play (Reproducir)].

4. Seleccione el volumen del teclado y presione la Tecla OK [SET

(CONFIRMAR)].

5. Seleccione el tipo de campanilla de alerta para los mensajes de texto

y presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)].

6. Seleccione la campanilla de los alertas para el mensaje de texto y

presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)]. Para oír la campanilla, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Play (Reproducir)].

7. Seleccione el tipo de campanilla para mensajes de multimedia y

presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)].

8. Seleccione la campanilla para envío de mensajes de multimedia y

presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)]. Para oír la campanilla, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Play (Reproducir)].

9. Seleccione el tipo de campanilla de alertas para mensajes de correo

de voz y presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)].

10. Seleccione la campanilla de alertas para mensajes de correo de voz

y presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)]. Para oír la campanilla, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Play (Reproducir)].

SONIDOS DE LLAMADAS

Para ajustar campanillas para los tipos de Llamadas recibidas:

CALL RINGTONE CAMPANILLAS DE LLAMADAS

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Call Sounds (Sonidos de Llamadas) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Call Ringtone (Campanillas de Llamadas) y presione

la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione una campanilla y presione la Tecla OK para grabar el

sonido. Para oír la campanilla, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Play (Reproducir)].

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Ajustes

CALL VIBRATE VIBRAR AL LLAMAR

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Call Sounds (Sonidos de Llamadas) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Call Vibrate (Vibración al Llamar) y presione la Tecla

OK.

3. Seleccione On (Activar) u Off (Desactivar) y presione la Tecla OK.

CALL ALERT ALERTA DE LLAMADA

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Call Sounds (Sonidos de Llamadas) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Call Alert (Alerta de Llamada) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione Ring Only (Solamente Campanilla), Caller ID + Ring

(Identificación del Interlocutor + Campanilla) o Name Repeat

(Repetición del Nombre) y presione la Tecla OK.

ALERT SOUNDS SONIDOS DE ALERTA

Para seleccionar el tipo de alerta para un nuevo mensaje:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Alert Sounds (Sonidos de Alerta) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione TXT Message (Mensaje de Texto), Pic/Voice Message

(Mensaje con Imagen/Voz), Voicemail (Correo de Voz) o Missed Call (Llamada No Contestada) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione acceder las siguientes Opciones y presione la Tecla OK.

•

Tone (Tono): Alerta sobre el tono. Seleccione el tono y presione la Tecla OK.

•

Vibrate ( Vibración): Alerta con vibración. Seleccione On (Activar) u Off

(Desactivar) y presione la Tecla OK.

•

Reminder (Membrete): Alerta sobre el intervalo de tiempo. Seleccione

Once (Una vez), Every 2 Minutes (A cada 2 Minutos), Every 15 Minutes (A cada 15 Minutos) u Off (Desactivar) y presione la Tecla OK.

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Ajustes

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 56-57090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 56-57 2009.6.12 10:12:24 AM2009.6.12 10:12:24 AM

TONO DE EMERGENCIA

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Alert Sounds (Sonidos de Alerta) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Emergency Tone (Tono de Emergencia) y presione

la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione Alert (Alerta), Vibrate (Vibración) u Off (Desac tivar)

y presione la Tecla OK.

SONIDOS DEL TECLADO

Para ajustar el sonido para el teclado alfanumérico cuando presione:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Keypad Sounds (Sonidos del Teclado) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione DTMF, Cloud (Nublado) o Simple y presione la Tecla OK.

VOLUMEN DEL TECLADO

Para ajustar el volumen del teclado.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Keypad Volume (Volumen del Teclado) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Ajuste el volumen presionando la Tecla de Dirección hacia arriba o

hacia abajo y presione la Tecla OK.

DIGIT DIAL REDAOUT LECTURA DE LA DIGITACION DE NUMEROS

El ajuste Digit Dial Redaut (Lectura de la Digitación de Números) controla si los dígitos se leerán en volumen alto cuando usted digite un número de teléfono en el teclado.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Digit Dial Redaut (Lec tura de la Digitación de

Números) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Ajustes

2. Seleccione On (Activar) u Off (Desactivar) y presione la Tecla OK.

ALERTAS DE SERVICIO

Para configurar cualquiera de las Opciones Alert (Alerta) en O n (Activar) u Off (Desactivar):

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Service Alerts (Alertas de Servicio) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione el acceso a las siguientes Opciones y presione la Tecla OK.

•

ERI: La función Enhanced Roaming Indicator (ERI) (Indicador Roaming

Perfeccionado) exhibe un banner de texto en la pantalla informando al usuario del móvil sobre que sistemas de dispositivo inalámbrico se están utilizando si fuere comparado con el plan de servicio adquirido. El texto ERI Banner se cambia para informar a un cliente si el está utilizando: Verizon Wireless Network (Red Verizon Wireless), Extended Network (Red Extendida) o Roaming.

•

Minute Beep (Señal Audible de Minuto): Alerta a cada minuto durante

una llamada.

•

Call Connect (Conexión de la Llamada): Alerta cuando la llamada es

conectada.

3. Seleccione On (Activar) u Off (Desactivar) y presione la Tecla OK.

CONEXION DE UN DISPOSITIVO

Permite la Activación o Desactivación de un Dispositivo:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Device Connect (Conexión de Un Dispositivo) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione On (Activar) u Off (Desactivar) y presione la Tecla OK.

POWER ON/OFF ACTIVACION/APAGADO DE LA ALIMENTACION

Para ajustar el móvil para emitir uno tono cuando el móvil es encendido/apagado:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Power On/Off (Activación/Desactivación de la

alimentación) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Ajustes

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 58-59090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 58-59 2009.6.12 10:12:25 AM2009.6.12 10:12:25 AM

2. Seleccione Power On (Activación de la Alimentación) o Power

Off (Apagado de la Alimentación) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione On (Activar) u Off (Desactivar) y presione la Tecla OK.

OPEN/CLOSE SOUNDS SONIDO DE APERTURA/CIERRE

Para ajustar el teléfono para que emita un tono cuando el teléfono esté abierto/ cerrado:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Sound Settings (Ajustes de Sonido) , presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Open/Close Sounds (Sonidos de Apertura/Cierre) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Music (Música), Simple (Simple), Beep (S eñal

Audible) u Off (Desactivado) y presione la Tecla OK.

AJUSTES DE LA PANTALLA

EASY SET UP CONFIGURACION FACIL

Para configurar las Opciones de la pantalla utilizando el tutorial Easy S et-up Wizard:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Easy Set-up (Configuración Fácil) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Digite el texto por exhibir en su pantalla principal y presione la Tecla

OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)]. Para saltar este paso, presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Skip (Saltar)].

3. Seleccione la duración para la luz de fondo y presione la Tecla OK

[SET (CONFIRMAR)].

4. Seleccione la duración para la luz de fondo del teclado y presione la

Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)].

5. Seleccione el papel de pared principal y presione la Tecla OK [SET

(CONFIRMAR)]. Para previsualizar la imagen, presione la Tecla de

Función Izquierda

[Preview (Previsualizar)].

6. Seleccione el papel de pared frontal y presione la Tecla OK [SET

(CONFIRMAR)]. Para previsualizar la imagen, presione la Tecla de

Función Izquierda

[Preview (Previsualizar)].

7. Seleccione el tema de exhibición y presione la Tecla OK [SET

(CONFIRMAR)]. Para previsualizar la imagen, presione la Tecla de

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Ajustes

Función Izquierda [Preview (Previsualizar)].

8. Seleccione el diseño del menú y presione la Tecla OK [SET

(CONFIRMAR)]. Para previsualizar el estilo del diseño, presione la

Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Preview (Previsualizar)].

9. Seleccione el tipo de menú y presione la Tecla OK [SET

(CONFIRMAR)]. Para visualizar el tutorial de ayuda para el tipo de

menú, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Help (Ayuda)].

El Paso 9 sólo se exhibirá cuando la opción List (Listar) o Grid (Lista) sea

seleccionada.

10. Seleccione el tamaño de la fuente para la marcación y presione

la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)]. Para previsualizar el tamaño de la fuente, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda [Preview

(Previsualizar)].

11. Seleccione el estilo del reloj para la pantalla principal y presione

la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)]. Para previsualizar el estilo del reloj, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Preview

(Previsualizar)].

12. Seleccione el estilo del reloj para la pantalla frontal y presione

la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)]. Para previsualizar el estilo del

reloj, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Preview

(Previsualizar)].

BANNER

PERSONAL BANNER BANNER PERSONAL

Personal Banner (Banner Pessoal) puede contener hasta 16 caracteres y se exhibirá en la

pantalla de su móvil en modo Idle (Inactivo).

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Banner y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Personal Banner (Banner Personal) y presione la

Tecla OK.

3. Digite el texto del Banner (hasta 16 caracteres).

4. Seleccione Font Color (Color de la Fuente), seleccione el color

deseado y presione la Tecla OK.

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Ajustes

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 60-61090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 60-61 2009.6.12 10:12:26 AM2009.6.12 10:12:26 AM

ERI BANNER BANNER ERI

Si usted utiliza el ERI Service (Ser vicio ERI), ERI Text (Texto ERI) se exhibirá en el campo del banner secundario.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Banner y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione ERI Banner (Banner ERI) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione On (Activar) u Off (Desactivar) y presione la Tecla OK.

BACKLIGHT LUZ DE FONDO

Para ajustar la duración de la iluminación de luz de fondo para la Pantalla Principal y Teclado:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Backlight (Luz de Fondo) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Display (Pantalla) o Keypad (Teclado) y presione la

Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione 7 Seconds (7 Segundos), 15 Seconds (15 Segundos),

30 Seconds (30 Segundos) o Always On (Siempre Activada) y

presione la Tecla OK.

Aunque se seleccione Always On (Siempre Activada) para el ajuste

Backlight (Luz de Fondo), la luz de fondo se desactivará cuando cierre

el móvil.

WALLPAPER PAPEL DE PARED

Para seleccionar el tipo del plan de fondo del LCD Principal o del LCD frontal por exhibirse en el móvil:

PANTALLA PRINCIPAL

Para seleccionar el tipo de plan de fondo del LCD principal por exhibirse en el móvil.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Wallpaper (Papel de Pared) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Ajustes

2. Seleccione Main Screen (Pantalla Principal) y presione la Tecla

OK.

3. Seleccione la imagen y presione la Tecla OK. Para visualizar la imagen,

presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[View (Visualizar)].

El ajuste estándar es World (Mundo).

4. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha [Get New (Obtener

Nueva)] seleccione Get New Applications (Obtener Nuevas Aplicaciones) y presione la Tecla OK para descargar otras selecciones

disponibles.

PANTALLA FRONTAL

Para seleccionar el plan de fondo de la LCD frontal por exhibirse en el móvil:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Wallpaper (Papel de Pared) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Front Screen (Pantalla Frontal) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione la imagen y presione la Tecla OK. Para visualizar la imagen,

presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[View (Visualizar)].

El ajuste estándar es Verizon_Water.

4. Presione la Tecla de Función Derecha [Get New (Obtener

Nueva)] seleccione Get New Applications (Obtener Nuevas Aplicaciones) y presione la Tecla OK para descargar otras selecciones

disponibles.

GLOBAL TRAVELER VIAJERO GLOBAL

Para cambiar el plan de fondo de la LCD Principal automáticamente.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Wallpaper (Papel de Pared) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Global Traveler (Viajero Global) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione On (Activar) u Off (Desactivar) y presione la Tecla OK.

El cambio automático del plan de fondo de la LCD es sopor tado en los

siguientes países: Bélgica, Brasil, Reino Unido, Francia, Alemania, Grecia, Italia, México, Holanda, Rusia y España. Para utilizar el papel de pared personal sin cambiar, según las regiones, ajuste Global Traveler (Viajero Global) en Off (Desactivado).

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Ajustes

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 62-63090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 62-63 2009.6.12 10:12:27 AM2009.6.12 10:12:27 AM

TEMAS DE LA PANTALLA

Para seleccionar el plan de fondo de la pantalla:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Display Themes (Temas de la

Pantalla) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Business Diary (Diario de Negocios), The World (El

Mundo), Water (Agua) o White (Blanco) y presione la Tecla OK

[SET (CONFIRMAR)]. Para previsualizar los temas, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Preview (Previsualizar)].

El ajuste estándar es The World (El Mundo).

3. Para visualizar el tutorial de ayuda para los temas, presione la Tecla

de Función Derecha [Help (Ayuda)].

Si usted cambia este ajuste, no podrá seguir las instrucciones indicadas

en el manual.

CONFIGURACIONES DEL MENU PRINCIPAL

Para cambiar el diseño y el tipo de Menú Principal:

PARA AJUSTAR EL DISEÑO DEL MENU LIST LISTAS

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla

OK. Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la

Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Main Menu Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla Principal) y enseguida presione

la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Menu Layout (Diseño del Menú) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione List (Lista) y presione la Tecla OK.

4. Seleccione Communicator (Comunicador) o Messaging (Envío

de Mensajes) y presione la Tecla OK.

Si usted cambia este ajuste, no podrá seguir las instrucciones según

indicado en el manual.

El ajuste estándar es List (Lista) y Communicator (Comunicador).

SUSTITUCION DE LOS ITEMS DEL MENU LIST LISTA

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla

OK. Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Ajustes

Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Main Menu Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla Principal) y enseguida presione

la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Replace Menu Items (Sustituir Ítems del Menú) y

presione la Tecla OK.

3. Si utilizar el perfil Communicator (Comunicador), seleccione My

Ringtones (Mis Campanillas), My Pictures (Mis Imágenes), Bluetooth o VZ Navigator (Navegador VZ) y presione la Tecla

OK [EDIT (EDITAR)]. Seleccione Email o Mobile IM (IM Móvil) y presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFORMAR)].

4. Si el perfil Messaging (Envío de Mensajes) es utilizado, seleccione

Email, Mobile IM (IM Móvil), My Ringtones (Mis Campanillas)

o VZ Navigator (Navegador VZ) y presione la Tecla OK [EDIT

(EDITAR)]. Seleccione Bluetooth o My Pictures (Mis Imágenes) y

presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFORMAR)].

5. Para visualizar el tutorial de ayuda para sustituir el ítem de menú,

presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Help (Ayuda)].

6. Presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Done (Hecho)] para

grabar sus modificaciones.

POSICION DE LOS ITEMS DEL MENU LIST LISTA

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla

OK. Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la

Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Main Menu Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla Principal) y enseguida presione

la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Position Menu Items (Posición de los Items del

Menú) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione el ítem por moverse y presione la Tecla OK [MOVE

(MOVER)].

4. Seleccione el cambio de posición y presione la Tecla OK [SET

(CONFIRMAR)].

REINICIACION DE LOS AJUSTES DEL MENU LIST LISTA

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla

OK. Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la

Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Main Menu Settings

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Ajustes

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 64-65090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 64-65 2009.6.12 10:12:28 AM2009.6.12 10:12:28 AM

(Configuraciones de la Pantalla Principal) y enseguida presione

la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Reset Menu Settings (Reiniciar Configuraciones del

Menú) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione el acceso a las siguientes Opciones y presione la Tecla OK.

•

Menu Layout (Diseño del Menú): Recupera el diseño del menú a los

ajustes iniciales.

•

Menu Items (Ítems del Menú): Recupera los ítems del menú al contenido

inicial del menú.

•

Item Positions (Posiciones de los Ítems): Recupera los ítems del menú a

sus posiciones iniciales.

•

All (Todas): Recupera todas las configuraciones iniciales del menú.

Si usted cambia este ajuste, no podrá seguir las instrucciones indicadas

en el manual.

FUENTES DE LLAMADA

Para ajustar el tamaño de la fuente:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla),

presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Dial Fonts (Fuentes de Marcación) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Normal o Large (Grande) y presione la Tecla OK. Para

previsualizar el tamaño de la fuente, presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Preview (Previsualización)].

TAMAÑO DE LA FUENTE DEL MENU

Para ajustar el tamaño de la fuente del menú:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Menu Font Size (Tamaño de la

Fuente del Menú) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Normal o Large (Grande) y presione la Tecla OK.

TIME & DATE HORA Y FECHA

Para ajustar hora y fecha de su móvil:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla),

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Ajustes

presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Time & Date (Hora y Fecha) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. En el campo Date (Fecha), digite la fecha.

3. Acceda el campo Time (Hora) y digite la hora. Presione la Tecla de

Función Izquierda

para cambiar el ajuste am y pm.

4. Acceda el campo DST (Horario de Verano) y presione la Tecla de

Dirección hacia la Izquierda o Derecha para seleccionar On (Activar) u Off (Desactivar).

5. Acceda el campo Current Time Zone (Zona Horaria Actual),

enseguida presione la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Set

(Confirmar)]. Seleccione la ciudad apropiada y presione la Tecla OK.

6. Presione la Tecla OK para grabar.

Este menú se exhibirá solamente en el modo GSM o Global.

FORMATO DEL RELOJ

Para seleccionar el tipo de reloj por exhibirse en la pantalla LCD principal o LCD Frontal:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Display Settings (Configuraciones de la Pantalla), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Clock Format (Formato del Reloj) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Main Clock (Reloj Principal) o Front Clock (Reloj

Frontal) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione una de las siguientes Opciones y presione la Tecla OK.

•

Main Clock (Reloj Principal): Ajusta el tipo de reloj para la pantalla

principal. Large Digital 12 (Digital Grande en el modo de 12 horas) es el ajuste estándar.

•

Front Clock (Reloj Frontal): Ajusta el tipo de reloj para la pantalla frontal.

Digital es el ajuste estándar.

AJUSTES DEL MOVIL

MODO AIRPLANE AVION

En el Modo Airplane (Avión), todas las funciones del menú se pueden acceder excepto la realización de llamadas, recepción de llamadas, conexión de datos y Bluetooth®. La activación del modo Airplane (Avión) deshabilitará todas las comunicaciones inalámbricas. En el modo Airplane (Avión), los servicios que sopor tan las funciones Location On (Localización Activada) se deshabilitarán temporalmente.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Ajustes

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 66-67090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 66-67 2009.6.12 10:12:29 AM2009.6.12 10:12:29 AM

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Airplane Mode (Modo Avión) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione On (Activar) u Off (Desactivar) y presione la Tecla OK.

ACCESOS RAPIDOS DEL MOVIL

Su móvil ofrece la opción de Atribución de una Tecla de acceso rápido (Tecla de

Dirección hacia la izquierda, derecha, hacia arriba y hacia abajo) para una función

favorita o frecuentemente utilizada. Además de ello, seleccione los ajustes del menú para cada una de las Opciones de acceso rápido bajo las Teclas de Dirección (Tecla de Dirección

hacia la derecha).

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Set Shortcuts (Accesos Rápidos del Móvil) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Set My Shortcuts (Ajustar Mis Accesos Rápidos) y

presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione Shortcut 1 (Acceso rápido 1), Shor tcut 2 (Acceso

rápido 2), Shortcut 3 (Acceso rápido 3) o Shortcut 4 (Acceso rápido 4) y presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)].

4. Seleccione la opción deseada y presione la Tecla OK.

La opción Download Application Alphabet (Descargar Aplicación Alfabética)

se exhibirá solamente cuando usted haya descargado Aplicaciones Brew. En el modo Idle (Inactivo), al presionar la Tecla de Dirección

hacia

la derecha exhibirá la pantalla My Shortcuts (Mis Accesos Rápidos). En la pantalla My Shortcuts (Mis Accesos Rápidos), usted puede seleccionar una función y presione la Tecla OK para acceder la función. En esta pantalla, usted puede reposicionar una función presionando la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Move (Mover)], presionando la Tecla de Dirección

hacia arriba o hacia abajo para posicionar y presionar la Tecla OK [SAVE

(GRABAR)]. También se puede presionar la Tecla de Función Izquierda

[Settings (Configuraciones)] para Set My Shortcuts (Ajustar Mis Accesos

Rápidos) o Set Directional Keys (Ajustar Teclas de Dirección).

REINICIACION MY SHORTCUTS MIS ACCESOS RAPIDOS

Para reiniciar My Shortcuts (Mis Accesos Rápidos) a los estándares originales:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Set Shortcuts (Accesos Rápidos del Móvil)

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Ajustes

y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Set My Shortcuts (Ajustar Mis Accesos Rápidos) y

presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione Shortcut 1 (Acceso rápido 1), Shor tcut 2 (Acceso

rápido 2), Shortcut 3 (Acceso rápido 3) o Shortcut 4 (Acceso rápido 4) y presione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options

(Opciones)].

4. Seleccione Reset Shortcut (1, 2, 3 o 4) (Reiniciar Acceso Rápido)

o Reset My Shortcuts (Reiniciar Mis Accesos Rápidos) y presione la Tecla OK.

5. Seleccione Yes (Sí) y presione la Tecla OK.

AJUSTE DE LAS TECLAS DE DIRECCION

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Set Shortcuts (Accesos Rápidos del

Móvil) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Set Directional Keys (Ajustar Teclas de Dirección) y

presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione UP Directional Key (Tecla de Dirección hacia Arriba),

LEFT Directional Key (Tecla de Dirección hacia la Izquierda)

o DOWN Directional Key (Tecla de Dirección hacia Abajo) y presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)].

4. Seleccione la opción deseada y presione la Tecla OK.

REINICIACION DE LOS AJUSTES DE LA TECLA DE DIRECCION

Utilice el siguiente procedimiento para volver a los ajustes de la Tecla de Dirección.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Set Shortcuts (Accesos Rápidos del Móvil) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Set Directional Keys (Ajustar Teclas de Dirección) y

presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione UP Directional Key (Tecla de Dirección hacia Arriba),

LEFT Directional Key (Tecla de Dirección hacia la Izquierda) o DOWN Directional Key (Tecla de Dirección hacia Abajo) y pre-

sione la Tecla de Función Derecha

[Options (Opciones)].

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Ajustes

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 68-69090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 68-69 2009.6.12 10:12:30 AM2009.6.12 10:12:30 AM

4. Seleccione Reset (UP, LEFT or DOWN) Key (Reiniciar Tecla Hacia

Arriba, Izquierda o Hacia Abajo) o Reset Directional Keys (Reiniciar Teclas de Dirección) y presione la Tecla OK.

5. Seleccione Yes (Sí) y presione la Tecla OK.

CONFIGURACIONES DE VOICE COMMANDS MANDOS DE VOZ

Usted puede utilizar la función Voice Commands (Mandos de Voz) para controlar su dispositivo.

CONFIRMACION

Cuando la función de reconocimiento de voz no es asegurada y reconocer un nombre o número correctamente, el sistema exhibirá una lista de hasta tres elecciones.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Voice Commands Settings

(Configuraciones de los Mandos de Voz) y enseguida presione

la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Confirmation (Confirmación) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione Automatic (Automático), Always Confirm (Siempre

Confirmar) o Never Confirm (Nunca Confirmar) y presione la

Tecla OK.

SENSIBILIDAD

El ajuste Sensitivity (Sensibilidad) controla como el software de reconocimiento de voz determinará cuando una palabra hablada es una combinación. Si usted frecuentemente oye los mensajes Please Repeat (Por favor, repita) o No Match Found (Ninguna combi-

nación encontrada), ajuste la sensibilidad para Reject Less (Rechazar menos). Si usted

frecuentemente recibe falsas activaciones (cuando el móvil reconozca un nombre que usted no pronunció), ajuste la sensibilidad en Reject More (Rechazar Más).

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Voice Commands Settings

(Configuraciones de los Mandos de Voz) y enseguida presione

la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Sensitivity (Sensibilidad) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione Most Sensitive (Más Sensible), Recommended

(Recomendado) o Least Sensitive (Menos Sensible) y presione

la Tecla OK.

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Ajustes

ADAPTACION

La función Voice Commands (Mandos de Voz) es independiente del parlante, lo que significa que no se exige ningún entrenamiento o adaptación. Algunos usuarios por tadores de características vehementes o voz incomún pueden tener dificultades al obtener una precisión alta con el parlante independientemente de la función Voice Commands (Mandos de Voz), por lo tanto la función Adapt Voice (Adaptar Voz) permite que los usuarios perfeccionen dramáticamente la precisión de reconocimiento a través de la adaptación. Los usuarios que logran un reconocimiento preciso aceptable podrán no detectar cualesquier beneficios adicionales al realizar la adaptación Adapt Voice (Adaptar Voz).

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Voice Commands Settings

(Configuraciones de los Mandos de Voz) y enseguida presione

la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Adaptation (Adaptación) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. Seleccione Adapt Voice (Adaptar Voz) o Reset Voice (Reiniciar

Voz) y presione la Tecla OK. Para iniciar presione la Tecla OK.

•

Adapt Voice (Adaptar Voz): Requiere la realización de grabaciones de

su voz para personalizar el sistema de reconocimiento de voz. Esto tardará algunos minutos.

•

Reset Voice (Reiniciar voz): Cuando el proceso de adaptación es concluido,

usted podrá reiniciar la adaptación a los ajustes estándar de fábrica.

La opción del menú Reset Voice (Reiniciar Voz) se exhibirá solamente

después de la terminación del proceso Adapt Voice (Adaptar Voz).

4. Espere por la señal audible y enseguida repita las frases utilizando un

tono normal de voz.

5. Repita los pasos 1 a 4 cuando termine una sesión completa; usted

accederá una pantalla que exhibirá el mensaje Adaptation

Complete (Adaptación Concluida).

PROMPTS

Permite que usted seleccione las características del sistema Voice Commands.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Voice Commands Settings

(Configuraciones de los Mandos de Voz) y enseguida presione

la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione Prompts y presione la Tecla OK.

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Ajustes

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 70-71090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 70-71 2009.6.12 10:12:31 AM2009.6.12 10:12:31 AM

3. Seleccione Mode (Modo) o Audio Playback (Reproducción de

Audio) y presione la Tecla OK.

•

Mode (Modo): Seleccione el modo del sistema Voice Commands (Mandos

de Voz) entre los siguientes:

- Prompts: Lee los prompts Voice Commands (Mandos de Voz).

- Redaut+Alerts (Lectura + Alertas): Lectura y emisión de tonos de

alerta, marcación de dígitos y menús al mismo tiempo.

- Readout (Lectura): Lectura de prompts, marcación de dígitos y menús.

- Tones Only (Solamente Tonos): Prompt solamente con un tono.

•

Audio Playback (Reproducción del Audio): Permite la reproducción del

audio a través del Altavoz y del auricular. Seleccione Automatic (Automático),

Speakerphone (Altavoz) o Earpiece (Auricular) y presione la Tecla OK.

ABOUT SOBRE

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Voice Commands Settings

(Configuraciones de los Mandos de Voz) y enseguida presione

la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione About (Sobre) y presione la Tecla OK.

3. La versión Nuance se exhibirá.

4. Presione la Tecla OK para volver a la pantalla anterior.

LANGUAGE IDIOMA

Para ajustar la función bilingüe en inglés o español:

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Language (Idioma) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Seleccione English (Inglés) o Español (Español) y presione la

Tecla OK.

LOCATION LOCALIZACION

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Location (Localización) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

Capítulo 4 − Funciones del Menú

Ajustes

2. Seleccione el acceso a las siguientes Opciones y presione la Tecla OK.

•

Location On (Localización Activada): Su localización ahora está

disponible para la red.

•

E911 Only (Solamente E911): Su localización se ocultará de la red y

aplicaciones, excepto para 911.

Cuando se seleccione Lock Setting (Ajuste de Bloqueo) para Location

Settings (Ajustes de Localización) bajo Restrictions (Restricciones) en el Menú Security (Seguridad), será necesario insertar un Lock Code (Código de Bloqueo). El código de bloqueo estándar son los últimos 4 dígitos del número de su móvil.

CURRENT COUNTRY PAIS ACTUAL

El menú Current Country (País Actual) permite que usted seleccione su localización actual.

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Current Country (País Actual) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Digite un nombre de país en el campo Go To (Vaya hacia) o selec-

cione el país apropiado y presione la Tecla OK [SET (CONFIRMAR)].

PHONE SECURITY SEGURIDAD DEL MOVIL

El menú Security (Seguridad) permite que usted proteja electrónicamente el móvil. El código de bloqueo estándar es los últimos 4 dígitos en el Número de su Móvil.

EDIT CODES EDICION DE CODIGOS

Para ajustar un nuevo Lock Code (Código de Bloqueo):

1. Presione la Tecla OK [MENU], seleccione Settings & Tools

(Configuraciones y Herramientas) y presione la Tecla OK.

Seleccione Phone Settings (Configuraciones del Móvil), presione la Tecla OK, seleccione Phone Security (Seguridad del Móvil) y enseguida presione la Tecla OK.

2. Digite el código de bloqueo de cuatro dígitos y presione la Tecla OK.

El código de bloqueo estándar es los últimos 4 dígitos del número de su móvil.

3. Seleccione Edit Codes (Editar Códigos) y presione la Tecla OK.

4. Seleccione el acceso a las siguientes Opciones y presione la Tecla OK.

•

Phone Only (Solamente Móvil): Permite que usted edite el código de

bloqueo para Phone Security (Seguridad del Móvil). El código de bloqueo estándar es los últimos 4 dígitos del número de su móvil.

•

Calls & Services (Llamadas y Servicios): Permite que usted edite el

Funciones del Menú − Capítulo 4

Ajustes

090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 72-73090612_WP8990_Zephyer_M_SP_R0.indd 72-73 2009.6.12 10:12:32 AM2009.6.12 10:12:32 AM

Verizon Escapade User Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual